Loading...
1/*
2 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
4 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
6 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
7 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
16#include <linux/bug.h>
17#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
22#include <asm/unaligned.h>
23
24/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
37 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
40 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
44 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
45 */
46
47/**
48 * DOC: Warning
49 *
50 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
56 *
57 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
69 */
70
71/**
72 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
73 *
74 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
75 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
76 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
77 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
78 *
79 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
80 * suspend.
81 *
82 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
83 *
84 */
85
86struct device;
87
88/**
89 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
90 *
91 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
93 */
94enum ieee80211_max_queues {
95 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
96 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
97};
98
99#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
100
101/**
102 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
103 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
107 */
108enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
109 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
110 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
111 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
113};
114#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
115
116/**
117 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
118 *
119 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
120 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
121 *
122 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
123 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
124 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
125 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
126 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
127 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
128 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
129 */
130struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
131 u16 txop;
132 u16 cw_min;
133 u16 cw_max;
134 u8 aifs;
135 bool acm;
136 bool uapsd;
137};
138
139struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
140 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
141 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
143 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
144};
145
146/**
147 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
148 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
152 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
154 */
155enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
156 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
161};
162
163/**
164 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
165 *
166 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
167 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
168 *
169 * @def: the channel definition
170 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
171 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
172 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
173 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
174 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
175 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
176 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
177 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
178 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
179 */
180struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
181 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
182 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
183
184 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
185
186 bool radar_enabled;
187
188 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
189};
190
191/**
192 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
193 *
194 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
195 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
196 *
197 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
198 * also implies a change in the AID.
199 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
200 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
202 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
203 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
204 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
205 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
206 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
208 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
210 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
211 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
212 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
213 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
214 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
215 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
217 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
218 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
219 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
220 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
221 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
222 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
223 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
224 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
225 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
226 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
227 * context had been assigned.
228 */
229enum ieee80211_bss_change {
230 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
231 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
232 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
233 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
234 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
235 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
236 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
237 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
238 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
239 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
240 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
241 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
242 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
243 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
244 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
245 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
246 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
247 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
248 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
249 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
250 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
251 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
252
253 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
254};
255
256/*
257 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
258 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
259 * filtering will be disabled.
260 */
261#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
262
263/**
264 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
265 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
266 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
267 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
268 */
269enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
270 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
271 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
272};
273
274/**
275 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
276 *
277 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
278 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
279 *
280 * @assoc: association status
281 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
282 * or not
283 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
284 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
285 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
286 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
287 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
288 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
289 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
290 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
291 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
292 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
293 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
294 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
295 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
296 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
297 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
298 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
299 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
300 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
301 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
302 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
303 * (see @sync_tsf)
304 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
305 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
306 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
307 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
308 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
309 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
310 * the current band.
311 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
312 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
313 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
314 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
315 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
316 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
317 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
318 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
319 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
320 * implies disabled
321 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
322 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
323 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
324 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
325 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
326 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
327 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
328 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
329 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
330 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
331 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
332 * your driver/device needs to do.
333 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
334 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
335 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
336 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
337 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
338 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
339 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
340 */
341struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
342 const u8 *bssid;
343 /* association related data */
344 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
345 bool ibss_creator;
346 u16 aid;
347 /* erp related data */
348 bool use_cts_prot;
349 bool use_short_preamble;
350 bool use_short_slot;
351 bool enable_beacon;
352 u8 dtim_period;
353 u16 beacon_int;
354 u16 assoc_capability;
355 u64 sync_tsf;
356 u32 sync_device_ts;
357 u8 sync_dtim_count;
358 u32 basic_rates;
359 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
360 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
361 u16 ht_operation_mode;
362 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
363 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
364 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
365 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
366 int arp_addr_cnt;
367 bool qos;
368 bool idle;
369 bool ps;
370 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
371 size_t ssid_len;
372 bool hidden_ssid;
373 int txpower;
374 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
375};
376
377/**
378 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
379 *
380 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
381 *
382 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
383 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
384 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
385 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
386 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
387 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
388 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
389 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
390 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
391 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
392 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
393 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
394 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
395 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
396 * station
397 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
400 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
401 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
402 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
403 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
404 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
405 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
406 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
407 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
408 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
409 * hardware queue.
410 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
411 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
412 * is for the whole aggregation.
413 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
414 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
415 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
416 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
417 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
418 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
419 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
420 * off-channel operation.
421 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
422 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
423 * it can be sent out.
424 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
425 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
426 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
427 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
428 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
429 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
430 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
431 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
432 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
433 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
434 * queue gets full.
435 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
436 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
437 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
438 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
439 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
440 * should kick the MLME state machine.
441 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
442 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
443 * status to user space)
444 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
445 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
446 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
447 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
448 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
449 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
450 * handled properly by the device.
451 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
452 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
453 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
454 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
455 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
456 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
457 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
458 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
459 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
460 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
461 * PS-Poll responses.
462 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
463 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
464 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
465 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
466 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
467 * monitor injection).
468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
470 *
471 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
472 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
473 */
474enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
475 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
476 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
477 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
478 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
483 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
484 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
485 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
486 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
487 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
488 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
489 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
490 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
491 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
492 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
493 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
496 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
498 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
499 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
502 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
504 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
506};
507
508#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
509
510/**
511 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
512 *
513 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
514 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
515 *
516 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
517 */
518enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
520};
521
522/*
523 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
524 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
525 */
526#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
528 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
529 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
530 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
534
535/**
536 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
537 * Rate Control algorithm.
538 *
539 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
540 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
541 *
542 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
543 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
544 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
545 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
548 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
550 * Greenfield mode.
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
552 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
554 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
556 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
557 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
558 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
559 */
560enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
561 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
562 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
563 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
564
565 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
568 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
569 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
574};
575
576
577/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
578#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
579
580/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
581#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
582
583/* maximum number of rate stages */
584#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
585
586/* maximum number of rate table entries */
587#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
588
589/**
590 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
591 *
592 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
593 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
594 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
595 *
596 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
597 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
598 *
599 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
600 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
601 *
602 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
603 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
604 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
605 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
606 * information
607 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
608 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
609 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
610 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
611 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
612 * information should then contain
613 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
614 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
615 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
616 */
617struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
618 s8 idx;
619 u16 count:5,
620 flags:11;
621} __packed;
622
623#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
624
625static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
626 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
627{
628 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
629 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
630 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
631}
632
633static inline u8
634ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
635{
636 return rate->idx & 0xF;
637}
638
639static inline u8
640ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
641{
642 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
643}
644
645/**
646 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
647 *
648 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
649 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
650 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
651 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
652 *
653 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
654 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
655 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
656 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
657 * @control: union for control data
658 * @status: union for status data
659 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
660 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
661 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
662 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
663 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
664 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
665 */
666struct ieee80211_tx_info {
667 /* common information */
668 u32 flags;
669 u8 band;
670
671 u8 hw_queue;
672
673 u16 ack_frame_id;
674
675 union {
676 struct {
677 union {
678 /* rate control */
679 struct {
680 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
681 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
682 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
683 u8 use_rts:1;
684 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
685 u8 short_preamble:1;
686 u8 skip_table:1;
687 /* 2 bytes free */
688 };
689 /* only needed before rate control */
690 unsigned long jiffies;
691 };
692 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
694 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
695 u32 flags;
696 /* 4 bytes free */
697 } control;
698 struct {
699 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
700 s32 ack_signal;
701 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
702 u8 ampdu_len;
703 u8 antenna;
704 void *status_driver_data[21 / sizeof(void *)];
705 } status;
706 struct {
707 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
708 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
709 u8 pad[4];
710
711 void *rate_driver_data[
712 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
713 };
714 void *driver_data[
715 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
716 };
717};
718
719/**
720 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
721 *
722 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
723 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
724 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
725 *
726 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
727 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
728 */
729struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
730 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
731 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
732};
733
734static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
735{
736 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
737}
738
739static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
740{
741 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
742}
743
744/**
745 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
746 *
747 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
748 *
749 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
750 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
751 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
752 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
753 *
754 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
755 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
756 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
757 */
758static inline void
759ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
760{
761 int i;
762
763 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
764 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
765 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
766 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
768 /* clear the rate counts */
769 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
770 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
771
772 BUILD_BUG_ON(
773 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
774 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
775 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
776 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
777}
778
779
780/**
781 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
782 *
783 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
784 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
785 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
786 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
787 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
788 * verification has been done by the hardware.
789 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
790 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
791 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
792 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
793 * the frame.
794 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
795 * the frame.
796 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
797 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
798 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
799 * merging.
800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
801 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
802 * (including FCS) was received.
803 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
804 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
805 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
806 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
807 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
808 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
809 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
810 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
811 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
812 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
813 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
814 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
815 * each A-MPDU
816 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
817 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
818 * monitoring purposes only
819 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
820 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
821 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
822 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
823 * on this subframe
824 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
825 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
826 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
827 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
828 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
829 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
830 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
831 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
832 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
833 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
834 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
835 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
836 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
837 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
838 * interleaved with other frames.
839 */
840enum mac80211_rx_flags {
841 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
842 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
843 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
844 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
845 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
846 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
847 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
848 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
849 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
850 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
851 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
852 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
853 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
854 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
855 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
856 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
857 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
858 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
859 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
860 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
861 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
862 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
863 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
864 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
865 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
866 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
867 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
868};
869
870#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
871
872/**
873 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
874 *
875 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
876 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
877 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
878 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
879 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
880 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
881 */
882enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
883 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
884 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
885 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
886 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
887};
888
889/**
890 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
891 *
892 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
893 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
894 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
895 *
896 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
897 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
898 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
899 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
900 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
901 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
902 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
903 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
904 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
905 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
906 * values were filled.
907 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
908 * support dB or unspecified units)
909 * @antenna: antenna used
910 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
911 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
912 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
913 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
914 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
915 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
916 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
917 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
918 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
919 */
920struct ieee80211_rx_status {
921 u64 mactime;
922 u32 device_timestamp;
923 u32 ampdu_reference;
924 u32 flag;
925 u16 freq;
926 u8 vht_flag;
927 u8 rate_idx;
928 u8 vht_nss;
929 u8 rx_flags;
930 u8 band;
931 u8 antenna;
932 s8 signal;
933 u8 chains;
934 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
935 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
936};
937
938/**
939 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
940 *
941 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
942 *
943 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
944 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
945 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
946 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
947 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
948 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
949 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
950 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
951 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
952 * for more.
953 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
954 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
955 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
956 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
957 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
958 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
959 * operating channel.
960 */
961enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
962 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
963 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
964 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
965 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
966};
967
968
969/**
970 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
971 *
972 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
973 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
974 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
975 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
976 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
977 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
978 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
979 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
980 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
981 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
982 */
983enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
984 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
985 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
986 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
987 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
988 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
989 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
990 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
991 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
992};
993
994/**
995 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
996 *
997 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
998 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
999 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1000 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1001 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1002 */
1003enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1004 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1005 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1006 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1007 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1008
1009 /* keep last */
1010 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1011};
1012
1013/**
1014 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1015 *
1016 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1017 *
1018 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1019 *
1020 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1021 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
1022 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1023 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1024 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1025 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
1026 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1027 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1028 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1029 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1030 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1031 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1032 *
1033 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1034 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1035 *
1036 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1037 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1038 *
1039 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1040 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1041 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1042 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1043 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1044 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1045 *
1046 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1047 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1048 * configured for an HT channel.
1049 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1050 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1051 */
1052struct ieee80211_conf {
1053 u32 flags;
1054 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1055 int max_sleep_period;
1056
1057 u16 listen_interval;
1058 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1059
1060 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1061
1062 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1063 bool radar_enabled;
1064 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1065};
1066
1067/**
1068 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1069 *
1070 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1071 * operation.
1072 *
1073 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1074 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1075 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1076 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1077 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1078 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1079 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1080 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1081 */
1082struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1083 u64 timestamp;
1084 bool block_tx;
1085 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1086 u8 count;
1087};
1088
1089/**
1090 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1091 *
1092 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1093 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1094 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1095 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1096 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1097 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1098 */
1099enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1100 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1101 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1102};
1103
1104/**
1105 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1106 *
1107 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1108 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1109 *
1110 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1111 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1112 * or the BSS we're associated to
1113 * @addr: address of this interface
1114 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1115 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1116 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
1117 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1118 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1119 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1120 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1121 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1122 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1123 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1124 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1125 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1126 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1127 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1128 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1129 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1130 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1131 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1132 * sizeof(void *).
1133 */
1134struct ieee80211_vif {
1135 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1136 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1137 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1138 bool p2p;
1139 bool csa_active;
1140
1141 u8 cab_queue;
1142 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1143
1144 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1145
1146 u32 driver_flags;
1147
1148#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1149 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1150#endif
1151
1152 /* must be last */
1153 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1154};
1155
1156static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1157{
1158#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1159 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1160#endif
1161 return false;
1162}
1163
1164/**
1165 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1166 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1167 *
1168 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1169 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1170 *
1171 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1172 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1173 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1174 */
1175struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1176
1177/**
1178 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1179 *
1180 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1181 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1182 *
1183 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1184 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1185 * particular key.
1186 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1187 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1188 * generation in software.
1189 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1190 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1191 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1192 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1193 * be done in software.
1194 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1195 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1196 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1197 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
1198 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1199 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1200 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1201 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1202 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1203 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1204 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1205 */
1206enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1207 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1208 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
1209 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
1210 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
1211 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
1212 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
1213};
1214
1215/**
1216 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1217 *
1218 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1219 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1220 *
1221 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1222 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1223 * encrypted in hardware.
1224 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1225 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1226 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1227 * @keylen: key material length
1228 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1229 * data block:
1230 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1231 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1232 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1233 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1234 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1235 */
1236struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1237 u32 cipher;
1238 u8 icv_len;
1239 u8 iv_len;
1240 u8 hw_key_idx;
1241 u8 flags;
1242 s8 keyidx;
1243 u8 keylen;
1244 u8 key[0];
1245};
1246
1247/**
1248 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1249 *
1250 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1251 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1252 *
1253 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1254 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1255 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1256 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1257 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1258 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1259 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1260 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1261 * key_idx value calculation:
1262 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1263 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1264 */
1265struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1266 u32 cipher;
1267 u16 iftype;
1268 u8 hdr_len;
1269 u8 pn_len;
1270 u8 pn_off;
1271 u8 key_idx_off;
1272 u8 key_idx_mask;
1273 u8 key_idx_shift;
1274 u8 mic_len;
1275};
1276
1277/**
1278 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1279 *
1280 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1281 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1282 *
1283 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1284 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1285 */
1286enum set_key_cmd {
1287 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1288};
1289
1290/**
1291 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1292 *
1293 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1294 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1295 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1296 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1297 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1298 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1299 */
1300enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1301 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1302 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1303 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1304 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1305 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1306 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1307};
1308
1309/**
1310 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1311 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1312 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1313 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1314 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1315 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1316 *
1317 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1318 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1319 */
1320enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1321 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1322 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1323 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1324 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1325};
1326
1327/**
1328 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1329 *
1330 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1331 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1332 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1333 */
1334struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1335 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1336 struct {
1337 s8 idx;
1338 u8 count;
1339 u8 count_cts;
1340 u8 count_rts;
1341 u16 flags;
1342 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1343};
1344
1345/**
1346 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1347 *
1348 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1349 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1350 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1351 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1352 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1353 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1354 *
1355 * @addr: MAC address
1356 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1357 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1358 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1359 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1360 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
1361 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1362 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
1363 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1364 * if wme is supported.
1365 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1366 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1367 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1368 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1369 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1370 * the station moves to associated state.
1371 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1372 * @rates: rate control selection table
1373 */
1374struct ieee80211_sta {
1375 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
1376 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1377 u16 aid;
1378 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1379 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1380 bool wme;
1381 u8 uapsd_queues;
1382 u8 max_sp;
1383 u8 rx_nss;
1384 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1385 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1386 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1387
1388 /* must be last */
1389 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1390};
1391
1392/**
1393 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1394 *
1395 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1396 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
1397 *
1398 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1399 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1400 */
1401enum sta_notify_cmd {
1402 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1403};
1404
1405/**
1406 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1407 *
1408 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1409 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1410 */
1411struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1412 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1413};
1414
1415/**
1416 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1417 *
1418 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1419 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1420 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1421 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1422 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1423 *
1424 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1425 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1426 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1427 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1428 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1429 * algorithm.
1430 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1431 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1432 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1433 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1434 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1435 * CCK frames.
1436 *
1437 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1438 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1439 * the FCS at the end.
1440 *
1441 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1442 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1443 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1444 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1445 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1446 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
1447 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
1448 *
1449 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1450 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1451 *
1452 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1453 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1454 * the 2.4 GHz band.
1455 *
1456 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1457 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1458 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1459 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1460 *
1461 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1462 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1463 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1464 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1465 *
1466 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1467 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1468 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
1469 *
1470 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1471 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
1472 *
1473 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1474 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1475 *
1476 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1477 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1478 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1479 *
1480 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1481 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
1482 *
1483 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1484 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
1485 *
1486 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1487 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1488 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1489 * that should be using more chains.
1490 *
1491 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1492 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1493 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1494 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
1495 *
1496 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1497 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1498 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1499 * conf_tx() operation.
1500 *
1501 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1502 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1503 * the stack.
1504 *
1505 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
1506 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1507 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1508 *
1509 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1510 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1511 * dtim_period).
1512 *
1513 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1514 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1515 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1516 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1517 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1518 * only in that case.
1519 *
1520 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1521 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1522 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1523 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1524 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1525 * the PS mode of connected stations.
1526 *
1527 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1528 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1529 * software.
1530 *
1531 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1532 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1533 * active interfaces.
1534 *
1535 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1536 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1537 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1538 * control for more details.
1539 *
1540 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1541 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1542 *
1543 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1544 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1545 * is supported.
1546 *
1547 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1548 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
1549 *
1550 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1551 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1552 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1553 *
1554 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1555 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1556 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1557 * CSA frame.
1558 */
1559enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
1560 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
1561 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1562 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
1563 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1564 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
1565 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
1566 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
1567 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
1568 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1569 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1570 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1571 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1572 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1573 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
1574 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
1575 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1576 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
1577 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
1578 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
1579 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
1580 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
1581 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
1582 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
1583 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
1584 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
1585 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
1586 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
1587 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
1588 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
1589};
1590
1591/**
1592 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
1593 *
1594 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1595 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1596 *
1597 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1598 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1599 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
1600 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1601 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
1602 *
1603 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1604 *
1605 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1606 * along with this structure.
1607 *
1608 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1609 *
1610 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1611 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1612 *
1613 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1614 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
1615 *
1616 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
1617 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
1618 *
1619 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
1620 * that HW supports
1621 *
1622 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
1623 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1624 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1625 *
1626 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1627 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1628 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
1629 *
1630 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1631 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
1632 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1633 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
1634 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1635 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
1636 *
1637 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1638 * can handle.
1639 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1640 * the hw can report back.
1641 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
1642 *
1643 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1644 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1645 * aggregation.
1646 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1647 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1648 * it shouldn't be set.
1649 *
1650 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1651 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1652 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
1653 *
1654 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1655 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
1656 *
1657 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1658 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1659 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1660 * adding _BW is supported today.
1661 *
1662 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1663 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1664 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1665 *
1666 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1667 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1668 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
1669 *
1670 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1671 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1672 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1673 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1674 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1675 * neither enabled.
1676 *
1677 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1678 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1679 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
1680 *
1681 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1682 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1683 * supported by HW.
1684 */
1685struct ieee80211_hw {
1686 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
1687 struct wiphy *wiphy;
1688 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
1689 void *priv;
1690 u32 flags;
1691 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
1692 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
1693 int vif_data_size;
1694 int sta_data_size;
1695 int chanctx_data_size;
1696 u16 queues;
1697 u16 max_listen_interval;
1698 s8 max_signal;
1699 u8 max_rates;
1700 u8 max_report_rates;
1701 u8 max_rate_tries;
1702 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1703 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
1704 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
1705 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
1706 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
1707 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
1708 u8 uapsd_queues;
1709 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
1710 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1711 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
1712};
1713
1714/**
1715 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1716 *
1717 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1718 *
1719 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1720 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1721 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1722 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1723 * is already used internally by mac80211.
1724 *
1725 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
1726 */
1727struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1728
1729/**
1730 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1731 *
1732 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1733 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1734 */
1735static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1736{
1737 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1738}
1739
1740/**
1741 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
1742 *
1743 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1744 * @addr: the address to set
1745 */
1746static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1747{
1748 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1749}
1750
1751static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1752ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
1753 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
1754{
1755 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
1756 return NULL;
1757 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
1758}
1759
1760static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1761ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
1762 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
1763{
1764 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
1765 return NULL;
1766 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
1767}
1768
1769static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1770ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
1771 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
1772{
1773 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
1774 return NULL;
1775 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
1776}
1777
1778/**
1779 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1780 * @hw: the hardware
1781 * @skb: the skb
1782 *
1783 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1784 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1785 */
1786void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1787
1788/**
1789 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
1790 *
1791 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1792 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1793 *
1794 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1795 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
1796 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1797 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1798 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
1799 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1800 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1801 *
1802 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1803 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1804 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1805 *
1806 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1807 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1808 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1809 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1810 *
1811 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1812 *
1813 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1814 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1815 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1816 * based on the receive flags.
1817 *
1818 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1819 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1820 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1821 * keys.
1822 *
1823 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1824 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1825 * handler.
1826 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
1827 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
1828 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1829 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
1830 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
1831 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
1832 *
1833 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1834 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1835 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
1836 */
1837
1838/**
1839 * DOC: Powersave support
1840 *
1841 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1842 *
1843 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1844 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1845 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1846 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1847 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1848 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1849 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1850 * it finds traffic directed to it.
1851 *
1852 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1853 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1854 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
1855 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1856 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
1857 *
1858 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1859 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1860 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
1861 *
1862 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1863 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1864 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1865 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
1866 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1867 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
1868 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
1869 *
1870 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1871 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1872 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1873 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1874 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1875 * periods.
1876 *
1877 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
1878 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1879 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1880 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1881 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1882 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1883 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1884 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1885 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1886 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1887 *
1888 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1889 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
1890 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
1891 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1892 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1893 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1894 *
1895 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1896 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
1897 */
1898
1899/**
1900 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1901 *
1902 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
1903 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
1904 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1905 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1906 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1907 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1908 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1909 *
1910 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1911 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
1912 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1913 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1914 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1915 *
1916 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1917 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1918 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1919 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1920 *
1921 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1922 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1923 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1924 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1925 * - a list of information element IDs
1926 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1927 *
1928 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1929 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1930 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1931 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1932 * vendor information elements.
1933 *
1934 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1935 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1936 *
1937 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1938 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1939 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1940 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1941 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1942 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1943 *
1944 *
1945 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1946 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1947 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1948 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1949 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1950 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1951 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1952 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1953 *
1954 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1955 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1956 * signal strength threshold checking.
1957 */
1958
1959/**
1960 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1961 *
1962 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1963 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1964 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1965 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1966 *
1967 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1968 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1969 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1970 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1971 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1972 * hardware flags.
1973 *
1974 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1975 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1976 * turned off otherwise.
1977 *
1978 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1979 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1980 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1981 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1982 */
1983
1984/**
1985 * DOC: Frame filtering
1986 *
1987 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1988 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1989 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1990 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1991 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
1992 *
1993 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
1994 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
1995 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
1996 *
1997 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
1998 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
1999 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2000 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2001 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2002 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2003 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2004 *
2005 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2006 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2007 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2008 * or dropped.
2009 *
2010 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2011 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2012 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2013 * the flag, but not clear it.
2014 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2015 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2016 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2017 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2018 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2019 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2020 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2021 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2022 */
2023
2024/**
2025 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2026 *
2027 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2028 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2029 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2030 *
2031 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2032 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2033 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2034 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2035 * the driver code.
2036 *
2037 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2038 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2039 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2040 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2041 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2042 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2043 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2044 *
2045 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2046 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2047 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2048 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2049 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2050 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2051 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2052 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2053 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2054 * @sta_notify callback.
2055 *
2056 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2057 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2058 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2059 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2060 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2061 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2062 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2063 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2064 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2065 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2066 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2067 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2068 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2069 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2070 *
2071 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2072 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2073 *
2074 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2075 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2076 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2077 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2078 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2079 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2080 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2081 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2082 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2083 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2084 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2085 *
2086 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2087 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2088 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2089 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2090 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2091 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2092 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2093 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2094 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2095 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2096 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2097 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2098 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2099 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2100 *
2101 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2102 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2103 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2104 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2105 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2106 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2107 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2108 *
2109 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2110 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2111 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2112 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2113 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2114 *
2115 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2116 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2117 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2118 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2119 */
2120
2121/**
2122 * DOC: HW queue control
2123 *
2124 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2125 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2126 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2127 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2128 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2129 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2130 *
2131 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2132 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2133 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2134 *
2135 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2136 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2137 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2138 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2139 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2140 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2141 * the hardware queue.
2142 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2143 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2144 *
2145 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2146 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2147 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2148 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2149 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2150 *
2151 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2152 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2153 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2154 * off-channel queue: 9
2155 *
2156 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2157 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2158 *
2159 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2160 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2161 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2162 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2163 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2164 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2165 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2166 *
2167 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2168 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2169 *
2170 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2171 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2172 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2173 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2174 */
2175
2176/**
2177 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2178 *
2179 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2180 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2181 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2182 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2183 *
2184 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2185 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2186 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2187 *
2188 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2189 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2190 * multicast address.
2191 *
2192 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2193 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2194 *
2195 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2196 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2197 *
2198 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2199 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2200 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2201 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2202 * honour this flag if possible.
2203 *
2204 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
2205 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
2206 *
2207 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
2208 *
2209 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2210 * those addressed to this station.
2211 *
2212 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
2213 */
2214enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2215 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2216 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2217 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2218 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2219 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2220 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2221 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
2222 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
2223 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
2224};
2225
2226/**
2227 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2228 *
2229 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2230 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
2231 *
2232 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2233 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
2234 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
2235 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2236 *
2237 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2238 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2239 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
2240 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
2241 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2242 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2243 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2244 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2245 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2246 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2247 * session is gone and removes the station.
2248 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2249 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2250 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2251 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
2252 */
2253enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2254 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2255 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
2256 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
2257 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2258 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2259 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
2260 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
2261};
2262
2263/**
2264 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2265 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
2266 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2267 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
2268 */
2269enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2270 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
2271 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
2272};
2273
2274/**
2275 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2276 *
2277 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
2278 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2279 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2280 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
2281 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
2282 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2283 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2284 * the peer.
2285 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2286 * by the peer
2287 */
2288enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2289 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2290 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
2291 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
2292 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
2293};
2294
2295/**
2296 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2297 *
2298 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2299 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2300 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2301 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2302 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2305 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2306 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2307 */
2308enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2309 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2310 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2311};
2312
2313/**
2314 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2315 *
2316 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2317 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2318 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2319 *
2320 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2321 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2322 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
2323 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
2324 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
2325 * Must be atomic.
2326 *
2327 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2328 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2329 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2330 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2331 * or zero.
2332 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2333 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2334 * is added.
2335 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2336 *
2337 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2338 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2339 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2340 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
2341 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2342 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
2343 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2344 *
2345 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2346 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2347 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2348 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2349 * reconfigured at resume time.
2350 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2351 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2352 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2353 * must return 1 from this function.
2354 *
2355 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2356 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2357 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2358 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2359 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2360 *
2361 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2362 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2363 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2364 * in suspend().
2365 *
2366 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
2367 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
2368 * and @stop must be implemented.
2369 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2370 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2371 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2372 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2373 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
2374 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2375 *
2376 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2377 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2378 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2379 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2380 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2381 *
2382 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2383 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2384 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2385 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2386 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2387 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2388 * MAC address of the device going away.
2389 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
2390 *
2391 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2392 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
2393 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
2394 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
2395 *
2396 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2397 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2398 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2399 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2400 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
2401 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2402 * can sleep.
2403 *
2404 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2405 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2406 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2407 *
2408 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2409 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
2410 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
2411 *
2412 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
2413 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
2414 *
2415 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2416 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2417 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
2418 * is enabled.
2419 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
2420 * The callback can sleep.
2421 *
2422 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2423 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2424 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
2425 * The callback must be atomic.
2426 *
2427 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2428 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2429 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2430 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2431 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2432 *
2433 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2434 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2435 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2436 *
2437 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
2438 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
2439 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2440 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
2441 * that power save is disabled.
2442 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2443 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2444 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2445 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2446 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2447 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2448 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
2449 * The callback can sleep.
2450 *
2451 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2452 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2453 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2454 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2455 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2456 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2457 * The callback can sleep.
2458 *
2459 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2460 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2461 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2462 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2463 *
2464 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
2465 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
2466 *
2467 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2468 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
2469 * The callback can sleep.
2470 *
2471 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2472 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2473 * this notification.
2474 * The callback can sleep.
2475 *
2476 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2477 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
2478 * The callback can sleep.
2479 *
2480 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2481 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2482 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
2483 * The callback must be atomic.
2484 *
2485 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2486 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2487 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2488 * The callback can sleep.
2489 *
2490 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
2491 * The callback can sleep.
2492 *
2493 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2494 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2495 *
2496 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
2497 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2498 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2499 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2500 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2501 * This callback can sleep.
2502 *
2503 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2504 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2505 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2506 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2507 *
2508 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2509 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2510 *
2511 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
2512 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2513 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2514 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
2515 *
2516 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2517 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2518 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2519 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
2520 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2521 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2522 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2523 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2524 * The callback can sleep.
2525 *
2526 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2527 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2528 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2529 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2530 * in @sta_state.
2531 * The callback can sleep.
2532 *
2533 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2534 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2535 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2536 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2537 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2538 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2539 * Must be atomic.
2540 *
2541 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
2542 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
2543 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
2544 * The callback can sleep.
2545 *
2546 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
2547 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
2548 * required function.
2549 * The callback can sleep.
2550 *
2551 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
2552 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
2553 * required function.
2554 * The callback can sleep.
2555 *
2556 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2557 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2558 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2559 * TSF synchronization.
2560 * The callback can sleep.
2561 *
2562 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2563 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2564 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
2565 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
2566 * The callback can sleep.
2567 *
2568 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2569 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2570 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2571 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
2572 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
2573 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
2574 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2575 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
2576 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2577 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2578 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2579 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2580 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2581 * - TX: 1.....7
2582 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2583 * - TX: 8..1...
2584 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2585 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2586 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2587 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2588 *
2589 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
2590 * The callback can sleep.
2591 *
2592 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2593 *
2594 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2595 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2596 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
2597 * The callback can sleep.
2598 *
2599 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2600 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2601 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2602 *
2603 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2604 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
2605 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
2606 *
2607 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
2608 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2609 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2610 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2611 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
2612 * The callback can sleep.
2613 *
2614 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2615 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2616 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2617 * completion of the channel switch.
2618 *
2619 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2620 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2621 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2622 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2623 *
2624 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
2625 *
2626 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2627 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2628 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2629 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2630 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2631 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
2632 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
2633 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2634 * must be accepted in this case.
2635 * This callback may sleep.
2636 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2637 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
2638 *
2639 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2640 *
2641 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
2642 *
2643 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2644 * queues before entering power save.
2645 *
2646 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2647 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2648 * The callback can sleep.
2649 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2650 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
2651 *
2652 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2653 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2654 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2655 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
2656 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
2657 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2658 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2659 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2660 * more-data bit must always be set.
2661 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2662 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
2663 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2664 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2665 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2666 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2667 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2668 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
2669 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2670 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2671 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
2672 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2673 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
2674 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
2675 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
2676 * This callback must be atomic.
2677 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2678 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2679 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
2680 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
2681 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2682 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2683 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2684 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
2685 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
2686 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
2687 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2688 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2689 * This callback must be atomic.
2690 *
2691 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2692 *
2693 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2694 *
2695 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2696 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2697 *
2698 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2699 * and can sleep.
2700 *
2701 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2702 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2703 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2704 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2705 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2706 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2707 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2708 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2709 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2710 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2711 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2712 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
2713 *
2714 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2715 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2716 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2717 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2718 * channel context with different settings
2719 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2720 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2721 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2722 * unbound from vif.
2723 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2724 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2725 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2726 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2727 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2728 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2729 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
2730 *
2731 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2732 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
2733 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2734 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2735 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2736 *
2737 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2738 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2739 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
2740 *
2741 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2742 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2743 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
2744 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
2745 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2746 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
2747 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
2748 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
2749 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2750 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
2751 *
2752 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2753 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2754 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2755 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
2756 */
2757struct ieee80211_ops {
2758 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2759 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2760 struct sk_buff *skb);
2761 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2762 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2763#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2764 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2765 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2766 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
2767#endif
2768 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2769 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2770 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2771 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2772 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
2773 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2775 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
2776 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2778 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2779 u32 changed);
2780
2781 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2782 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2783
2784 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2785 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
2786 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2787 unsigned int changed_flags,
2788 unsigned int *total_flags,
2789 u64 multicast);
2790 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2791 bool set);
2792 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
2793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2794 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
2795 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2797 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2798 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2799 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
2800 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2802 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
2803 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2804 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
2805 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2806 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
2807 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2809 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2810 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2811 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2812 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
2813 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2815 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2816 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2817 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2818 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
2819 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2820 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
2821 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
2822 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
2823 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2825 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2826 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2827#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2828 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2830 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2831 struct dentry *dir);
2832 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2834 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2835 struct dentry *dir);
2836#endif
2837 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2838 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2839 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2840 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2841 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2842 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
2843 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2845 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2846 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2848 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2849 u32 changed);
2850 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
2852 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
2853 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2854 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2855 u64 tsf);
2856 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2857 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2858 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2860 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
2861 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2862 u8 buf_size);
2863 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2864 struct survey_info *survey);
2865 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2866 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
2867#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
2868 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2869 void *data, int len);
2870 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2871 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2872 void *data, int len);
2873#endif
2874 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 queues, bool drop);
2875 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2876 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
2877 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2878 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
2879
2880 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2882 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
2883 int duration,
2884 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
2885 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2886 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2887 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2888 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
2889 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2890 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2891 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
2892 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2893 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2894 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
2895
2896 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2897 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2898 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2899 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2900 bool more_data);
2901 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2902 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2903 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2904 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2905 bool more_data);
2906
2907 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2908 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2909 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2910 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2911 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2912 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2913 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2914 u32 sset, u8 *data);
2915 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2916 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
2917
2918 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2920
2921 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2922 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2923 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2924 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2925 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2926 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2927 u32 changed);
2928 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2930 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2931 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2933 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2934
2935 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2936
2937#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2938 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2939 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2940 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2941#endif
2942 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2943 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2944 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
2945
2946 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2947 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2948};
2949
2950/**
2951 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2952 *
2953 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2954 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2955 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2956 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2957 * @priv_data_len.
2958 *
2959 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2960 * @ops: callbacks for this device
2961 *
2962 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
2963 */
2964struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2965 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2966
2967/**
2968 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2969 *
2970 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2971 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2972 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
2973 *
2974 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
2975 *
2976 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
2977 */
2978int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2979
2980/**
2981 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2982 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2983 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2984 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2985 */
2986struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2987 int throughput;
2988 int blink_time;
2989};
2990
2991/**
2992 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
2993 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
2994 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
2995 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
2996 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
2997 */
2998enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
2999 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3000 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3001 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3002};
3003
3004#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3005char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3006char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3007char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3008char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3009char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3010 unsigned int flags,
3011 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3012 unsigned int blink_table_len);
3013#endif
3014/**
3015 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3016 *
3017 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3018 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3019 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3020 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3021 *
3022 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3023 *
3024 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3025 */
3026static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3027{
3028#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3029 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3030#else
3031 return NULL;
3032#endif
3033}
3034
3035/**
3036 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3037 *
3038 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3039 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3040 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3041 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3042 *
3043 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3044 *
3045 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3046 */
3047static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3048{
3049#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3050 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3051#else
3052 return NULL;
3053#endif
3054}
3055
3056/**
3057 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3058 *
3059 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3060 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3061 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3062 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3063 *
3064 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3065 *
3066 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3067 */
3068static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3069{
3070#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3071 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3072#else
3073 return NULL;
3074#endif
3075}
3076
3077/**
3078 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3079 *
3080 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3081 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3082 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3083 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3084 *
3085 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3086 *
3087 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3088 */
3089static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3090{
3091#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3092 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3093#else
3094 return NULL;
3095#endif
3096}
3097
3098/**
3099 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3100 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
3101 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
3102 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3103 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3104 *
3105 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3106 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3107 *
3108 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
3109 */
3110static inline char *
3111ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
3112 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3113 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3114{
3115#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3116 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
3117 blink_table_len);
3118#else
3119 return NULL;
3120#endif
3121}
3122
3123/**
3124 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3125 *
3126 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3127 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3128 *
3129 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3130 */
3131void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3132
3133/**
3134 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3135 *
3136 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3137 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
3138 * before calling this function.
3139 *
3140 * @hw: the hardware to free
3141 */
3142void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3143
3144/**
3145 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3146 *
3147 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3148 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3149 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3150 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3151 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3152 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3153 *
3154 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3155 */
3156void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3157
3158/**
3159 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3160 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3161 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3162 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3163 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3164 * @poll: poll function
3165 * @weight: default weight
3166 *
3167 * See also netif_napi_add().
3168 */
3169void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3170 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3171 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3172 int weight);
3173
3174/**
3175 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3176 *
3177 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3178 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3179 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3180 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3181 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3182 *
3183 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3184 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3185 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3186 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3187 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3188 *
3189 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
3190 *
3191 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3192 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3193 */
3194void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
3195
3196/**
3197 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3198 *
3199 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
3200 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3201 *
3202 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
3203 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3204 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3205 *
3206 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3207 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3208 */
3209void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
3210
3211/**
3212 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3213 *
3214 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3215 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3216 *
3217 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
3218 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3219 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3220 *
3221 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3222 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3223 */
3224static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3225 struct sk_buff *skb)
3226{
3227 local_bh_disable();
3228 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3229 local_bh_enable();
3230}
3231
3232/**
3233 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3234 *
3235 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3236 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3237 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3238 *
3239 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3240 *
3241 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3242 * each other.
3243 *
3244 * @sta: currently connected sta
3245 * @start: start or stop PS
3246 *
3247 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
3248 */
3249int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3250
3251/**
3252 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3253 * (in process context)
3254 *
3255 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3256 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3257 * applies.
3258 *
3259 * @sta: currently connected sta
3260 * @start: start or stop PS
3261 *
3262 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
3263 */
3264static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3265 bool start)
3266{
3267 int ret;
3268
3269 local_bh_disable();
3270 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3271 local_bh_enable();
3272
3273 return ret;
3274}
3275
3276/*
3277 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3278 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3279 */
3280#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
3281
3282/**
3283 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
3284 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
3285 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3286 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
3287 *
3288 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
3289 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3290 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
3291 *
3292 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3293 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3294 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3295 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3296 *
3297 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3298 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3299 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3300 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3301 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3302 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3303 *
3304 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3305 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3306 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3307 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3308 * use this API.
3309 */
3310void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3311 u8 tid, bool buffered);
3312
3313/**
3314 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3315 *
3316 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3317 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3318 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3319 *
3320 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3321 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3322 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3323 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3324 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3325 */
3326void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3327 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3328 struct sk_buff *skb,
3329 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3330 int max_rates);
3331
3332/**
3333 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3334 *
3335 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3336 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3337 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3338 *
3339 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3340 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
3341 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
3342 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3343 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
3344 *
3345 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3346 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3347 */
3348void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3349 struct sk_buff *skb);
3350
3351/**
3352 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3353 *
3354 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3355 *
3356 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3357 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3358 * for a single hardware.
3359 *
3360 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3361 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3362 */
3363static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3364 struct sk_buff *skb)
3365{
3366 local_bh_disable();
3367 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3368 local_bh_enable();
3369}
3370
3371/**
3372 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
3373 *
3374 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3375 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3376 *
3377 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3378 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3379 *
3380 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3381 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3382 */
3383void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3384 struct sk_buff *skb);
3385
3386/**
3387 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3388 *
3389 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3390 * connected STA.
3391 *
3392 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3393 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3394 */
3395void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3396
3397/**
3398 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3399 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3401 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3402 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3403 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3404 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3405 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3406 *
3407 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3408 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3409 *
3410 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3411 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3412 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3413 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3414 *
3415 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3416 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3417 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3418 *
3419 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3420 *
3421 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3422 */
3423struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3424 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3425 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3426
3427/**
3428 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3429 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3431 *
3432 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
3433 *
3434 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
3435 */
3436static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3437 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3438{
3439 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3440}
3441
3442/**
3443 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3444 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3445 *
3446 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
3447 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
3448 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3449 */
3450void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3451
3452/**
3453 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
3454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3455 *
3456 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3457 */
3458bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3459
3460
3461/**
3462 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3463 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3464 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3465 *
3466 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3467 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3468 *
3469 * Can only be called in AP mode.
3470 *
3471 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
3472 */
3473struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3475
3476/**
3477 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3478 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3479 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3480 *
3481 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3482 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3483 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3484 *
3485 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3486 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
3487 *
3488 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
3489 */
3490struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3492
3493/**
3494 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3495 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3496 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3497 *
3498 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3499 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3500 * BSSID and address is used.
3501 *
3502 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3503 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
3504 *
3505 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
3506 */
3507struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3508 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3509
3510/**
3511 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3512 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3513 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3514 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3515 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
3516 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
3517 *
3518 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3519 * hardware.
3520 *
3521 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
3522 */
3523struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3525 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
3526 size_t tailroom);
3527
3528/**
3529 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3530 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3531 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3532 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3533 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
3534 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
3535 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3536 *
3537 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3538 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3539 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3540 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3541 */
3542void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3543 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
3544 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
3545 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3546
3547/**
3548 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3549 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3550 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3551 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3552 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
3553 *
3554 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3555 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3556 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
3557 *
3558 * Return: The duration.
3559 */
3560__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3561 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
3562 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
3563
3564/**
3565 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3566 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3567 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3568 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3569 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
3570 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
3571 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3572 *
3573 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3574 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3575 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3576 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3577 */
3578void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3579 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3580 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
3581 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
3582 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3583
3584/**
3585 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3586 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3587 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3588 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3589 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
3590 *
3591 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3592 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3593 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
3594 *
3595 * Return: The duration.
3596 */
3597__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3598 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3599 size_t frame_len,
3600 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
3601
3602/**
3603 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3604 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3605 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3606 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
3607 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
3608 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
3609 *
3610 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3611 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
3612 *
3613 * Return: The duration.
3614 */
3615__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3617 enum ieee80211_band band,
3618 size_t frame_len,
3619 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
3620
3621/**
3622 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3623 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3624 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3625 *
3626 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3627 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3628 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3629 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
3630 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3631 *
3632 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3633 * frames are available.
3634 *
3635 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3636 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3637 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3638 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3639 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3640 * use common code for all beacons.
3641 */
3642struct sk_buff *
3643ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3644
3645/**
3646 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3647 *
3648 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3649 *
3650 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3651 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3652 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3653 */
3654void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3655 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3656
3657/**
3658 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
3659 *
3660 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3661 * from the given packet.
3662 *
3663 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3664 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3665 * with this P1K
3666 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3667 */
3668static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3669 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3670{
3671 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3672 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3673 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3674
3675 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3676}
3677
3678/**
3679 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3680 *
3681 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3682 * and transmitter address.
3683 *
3684 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3685 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3686 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3687 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3688 */
3689void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3690 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3691
3692/**
3693 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3694 *
3695 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3696 * in the packet.
3697 *
3698 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3699 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3700 * encrypted with this key
3701 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3702 */
3703void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3704 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
3705
3706/**
3707 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3708 *
3709 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3710 * previously installed master key.
3711 *
3712 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3713 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3714 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3715 */
3716void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3717 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3718
3719/**
3720 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3721 *
3722 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3723 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3724 * reverse order than in packet)
3725 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3726 * reverse order than in packet)
3727 */
3728struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3729 union {
3730 struct {
3731 u32 iv32;
3732 u16 iv16;
3733 } tkip;
3734 struct {
3735 u8 pn[6];
3736 } ccmp;
3737 struct {
3738 u8 pn[6];
3739 } aes_cmac;
3740 };
3741};
3742
3743/**
3744 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3745 *
3746 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3747 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3748 *
3749 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3750 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3751 * offloaded to the device.
3752 *
3753 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3754 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3755 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3756 */
3757void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3758 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3759
3760/**
3761 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3762 *
3763 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3764 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3765 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3766 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3767 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3768 *
3769 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3770 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3771 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3772 *
3773 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3774 * can be done concurrently.
3775 */
3776void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3777 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3778
3779/**
3780 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3781 *
3782 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3783 * @seq: new sequence data
3784 *
3785 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3786 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3787 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3788 * ARP requests.
3789 *
3790 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3791 * can be done concurrently.
3792 */
3793void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3794 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3795
3796/**
3797 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3798 *
3799 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3800 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3801 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3802 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3803 * @seq: new sequence data
3804 *
3805 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3806 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3807 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3808 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3809 *
3810 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3811 * can be done concurrently.
3812 */
3813void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3814 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3815
3816/**
3817 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3818 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3819 *
3820 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3821 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3822 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3823 *
3824 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3825 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3826 */
3827void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3828
3829/**
3830 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3831 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3832 * @keyconf: new key data
3833 *
3834 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3835 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3836 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3837 *
3838 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3839 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3840 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3841 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3842 *
3843 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3844 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3845 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3846 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3847 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3848 * of the reconfiguration.
3849 *
3850 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3851 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3852 *
3853 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3854 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3855 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3856 * the key that's being replaced.
3857 */
3858struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3859ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3860 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3861
3862/**
3863 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3864 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3865 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3866 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3867 * @gfp: allocation flags
3868 */
3869void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3870 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3871
3872/**
3873 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3874 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3875 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3876 *
3877 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3878 */
3879void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3880
3881/**
3882 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3883 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3884 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3885 *
3886 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3887 */
3888void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3889
3890/**
3891 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3892 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3893 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3894 *
3895 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3896 *
3897 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
3898 */
3899
3900int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3901
3902/**
3903 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3904 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3905 *
3906 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3907 */
3908void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3909
3910/**
3911 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3912 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3913 *
3914 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3915 */
3916void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3917
3918/**
3919 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3920 *
3921 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3922 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
3923 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3924 * any context, including hardirq context.
3925 *
3926 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
3927 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
3928 */
3929void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
3930
3931/**
3932 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3933 *
3934 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3935 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3936 *
3937 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3938 */
3939void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3940
3941/**
3942 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3943 *
3944 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3945 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3946 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3947 * while associating, for instance.
3948 *
3949 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3950 */
3951void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3952
3953/**
3954 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3955 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3956 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3957 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3958 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3959 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3960 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3961 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3962 */
3963enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3964 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3965 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3966};
3967
3968/**
3969 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
3970 *
3971 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3972 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3973 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3974 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3975 * be used.
3976 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
3977 *
3978 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
3979 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
3980 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
3981 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3982 */
3983void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3984 u32 iter_flags,
3985 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
3986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
3987 void *data);
3988
3989/**
3990 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
3991 *
3992 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3993 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3994 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
3995 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
3996 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
3997 *
3998 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
3999 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4000 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4001 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4002 */
4003void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 u32 iter_flags,
4005 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4006 u8 *mac,
4007 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4008 void *data);
4009
4010/**
4011 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4012 *
4013 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4014 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4015 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4016 *
4017 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4018 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4019 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4020 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4021 */
4022void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4023 u32 iter_flags,
4024 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4025 u8 *mac,
4026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4027 void *data);
4028
4029/**
4030 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4031 *
4032 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4033 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4034 *
4035 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4036 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4037 */
4038void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4039
4040/**
4041 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4042 *
4043 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4044 * workqueue.
4045 *
4046 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4047 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4048 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4049 */
4050void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4051 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4052 unsigned long delay);
4053
4054/**
4055 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
4056 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
4057 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4058 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
4059 *
4060 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
4061 *
4062 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4063 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4064 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4065 */
4066int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4067 u16 timeout);
4068
4069/**
4070 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
4071 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4072 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4073 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4074 *
4075 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
4076 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4077 * from any context.
4078 */
4079void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
4080 u16 tid);
4081
4082/**
4083 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
4084 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
4085 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
4086 *
4087 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
4088 *
4089 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4090 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4091 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4092 */
4093int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
4094
4095/**
4096 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
4097 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4098 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4099 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4100 *
4101 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
4102 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4103 * can be called from any context.
4104 */
4105void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
4106 u16 tid);
4107
4108/**
4109 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4110 *
4111 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
4112 * @addr: station's address
4113 *
4114 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4115 *
4116 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
4117 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4118 */
4119struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 const u8 *addr);
4121
4122/**
4123 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
4124 *
4125 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4126 * @addr: remote station's address
4127 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
4128 *
4129 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4130 *
4131 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
4132 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4133 *
4134 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4135 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4136 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4137 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4138 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4139 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4140 * is not reliable.
4141 *
4142 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
4143 */
4144struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4145 const u8 *addr,
4146 const u8 *localaddr);
4147
4148/**
4149 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4150 * @hw: the hardware
4151 * @pubsta: the station
4152 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4153 *
4154 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4155 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4156 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4157 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4158 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4159 *
4160 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4161 * manner.
4162 *
4163 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4164 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4165 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4166 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4167 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4168 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4169 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4170 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4171 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4172 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4173 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4174 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4175 * woke up while blocked or not.
4176 */
4177void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4179
4180/**
4181 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4182 * @pubsta: the station
4183 *
4184 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4185 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4186 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4187 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4188 *
4189 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4190 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4191 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4192 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4193 *
4194 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4195 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4196 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4197 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
4198 */
4199void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
4200
4201/**
4202 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4203 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4204 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4205 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4206 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4207 *
4208 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4209 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4210 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4211 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4212 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4213 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
4214 *
4215 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4216 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4217 * set_key callback.
4218 */
4219void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4223 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4224 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4225 void *data),
4226 void *iter_data);
4227
4228/**
4229 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4230 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4231 * @iter: iterator function
4232 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4233 *
4234 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4235 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4236 * places while calling into the driver.
4237 *
4238 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4239 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4240 * removed.
4241 *
4242 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4243 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4244 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4245 * or not.
4246 */
4247void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4248 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4249 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4251 void *data),
4252 void *iter_data);
4253
4254/**
4255 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4256 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4257 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4258 *
4259 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4260 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4261 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4262 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4263 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
4264 * %NULL.
4265 *
4266 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4267 */
4268struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4270
4271/**
4272 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4273 *
4274 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4275 *
4276 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
4277 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
4278 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4279 */
4280void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4281
4282/**
4283 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4284 *
4285 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4286 *
4287 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
4288 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4289 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
4290 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4291 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
4292 *
4293 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4294 * without connection recovery attempts.
4295 */
4296void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4297
4298/**
4299 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4300 *
4301 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4302 *
4303 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4304 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4305 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4306 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4307 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4308 *
4309 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4310 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4311 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4312 * disconnect normally later.
4313 *
4314 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4315 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4316 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4317 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4318 */
4319void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4320
4321/**
4322 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4323 * rssi threshold triggered
4324 *
4325 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4326 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4327 * @gfp: context flags
4328 *
4329 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
4330 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4331 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4332 */
4333void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4334 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4335 gfp_t gfp);
4336
4337/**
4338 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4339 *
4340 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4341 */
4342void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4343
4344/**
4345 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4346 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4347 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4348 *
4349 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4350 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4351 */
4352void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4353
4354/**
4355 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4356 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4357 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
4358 *
4359 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4360 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4361 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4362 */
4363void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4364 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4365
4366/**
4367 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4368 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4369 */
4370void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4371
4372/**
4373 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4374 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4375 */
4376void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4377
4378/**
4379 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4380 *
4381 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4382 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4383 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4384 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4385 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4386 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4387 *
4388 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4389 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4390 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4391 */
4392void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4393 const u8 *addr);
4394
4395/**
4396 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4397 *
4398 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4399 * buffer.
4400 *
4401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4402 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4403 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4404 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4405 */
4406void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4407
4408/* Rate control API */
4409
4410/**
4411 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
4412 *
4413 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4414 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4415 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
4416 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4417 * to be filled in
4418 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4419 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4420 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4421 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4422 * RTS threshold
4423 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4424 * if the selected rate supports it
4425 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
4426 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4427 * rate_idx_mask)
4428 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
4429 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
4430 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
4431 */
4432struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4433 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4434 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4435 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4436 struct sk_buff *skb;
4437 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4438 bool rts, short_preamble;
4439 u8 max_rate_idx;
4440 u32 rate_idx_mask;
4441 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
4442 bool bss;
4443};
4444
4445struct rate_control_ops {
4446 const char *name;
4447 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
4448 void (*free)(void *priv);
4449
4450 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4451 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4452 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4453 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
4454 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4455 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4456 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4457 u32 changed);
4458 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4459 void *priv_sta);
4460
4461 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4462 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4463 struct sk_buff *skb);
4464 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4465 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4466
4467 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4468 struct dentry *dir);
4469 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4470};
4471
4472static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4473 enum ieee80211_band band,
4474 int index)
4475{
4476 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4477}
4478
4479/**
4480 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4481 *
4482 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4483 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4484 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4485 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4486 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4487 * not null.
4488 *
4489 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4490 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4491 *
4492 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4493 * that this may be null.
4494 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4495 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4496 */
4497bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4498 void *priv_sta,
4499 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4500
4501
4502static inline s8
4503rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4504 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4505{
4506 int i;
4507
4508 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4509 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4510 return i;
4511
4512 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
4513 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
4514
4515 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
4516 return 0;
4517}
4518
4519static inline
4520bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4521 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4522{
4523 unsigned int i;
4524
4525 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4526 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4527 return true;
4528 return false;
4529}
4530
4531/**
4532 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4533 *
4534 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4535 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4536 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4537 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4538 *
4539 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4540 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4541 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4542 */
4543int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4544 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4545 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4546
4547int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4548void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4549
4550static inline bool
4551conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4552{
4553 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
4554}
4555
4556static inline bool
4557conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4558{
4559 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4560 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
4561}
4562
4563static inline bool
4564conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4565{
4566 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4567 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
4568}
4569
4570static inline bool
4571conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4572{
4573 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
4574}
4575
4576static inline bool
4577conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4578{
4579 return conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
4580}
4581
4582static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4583ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4584{
4585 if (p2p) {
4586 switch (type) {
4587 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4588 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4589 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4590 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4591 default:
4592 break;
4593 }
4594 }
4595 return type;
4596}
4597
4598static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4599ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4600{
4601 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4602}
4603
4604void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4605 int rssi_min_thold,
4606 int rssi_max_thold);
4607
4608void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4609
4610/**
4611 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
4612 *
4613 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4614 *
4615 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4616 *
4617 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4618 * applicable.
4619 */
4620int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4621
4622/**
4623 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4624 * @vif: virtual interface
4625 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4626 * @gfp: allocation flags
4627 *
4628 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4629 */
4630void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4631 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4632 gfp_t gfp);
4633
4634/**
4635 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4636 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4637 * @vif: virtual interface
4638 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4639 * @band: the band to transmit on
4640 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4641 *
4642 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4643 */
4644bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4645 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4646 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4647
4648/**
4649 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4650 *
4651 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4652 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4653 *
4654 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4655 *
4656 * private:
4657 *
4658 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4659 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4660 */
4661struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4662 u32 next_tsf;
4663 bool has_next_tsf;
4664
4665 u8 absent;
4666
4667 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4668 struct {
4669 u32 start;
4670 u32 duration;
4671 u32 interval;
4672 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4673};
4674
4675/**
4676 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4677 *
4678 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4679 * @data: NoA tracking data
4680 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4681 *
4682 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4683 */
4684int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4685 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4686
4687/**
4688 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4689 *
4690 * @data: NoA tracking data
4691 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4692 */
4693void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4694
4695#endif /* MAC80211_H */
1/*
2 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
4 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
6 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
7 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
8 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
9 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
18#include <linux/bug.h>
19#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
22#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
23#include <net/cfg80211.h>
24#include <net/codel.h>
25#include <asm/unaligned.h>
26
27/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48 */
49
50/**
51 * DOC: Warning
52 *
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
59 *
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72 */
73
74/**
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
89/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
122struct device;
123
124/**
125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
133};
134
135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
137/**
138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
151
152/**
153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
157 *
158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
165 */
166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
167 u16 txop;
168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
170 u8 aifs;
171 bool acm;
172 bool uapsd;
173};
174
175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
182/**
183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
205 * @def: the channel definition
206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
219
220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
222 bool radar_enabled;
223
224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
225};
226
227/**
228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
295 * changed
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
303 */
304enum ieee80211_bss_change {
305 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
309 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
310 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
315 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
316 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
317 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
318 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
319 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
320 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
321 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
322 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
323 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
324 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
326 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
327 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
328 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
329
330 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
331};
332
333/*
334 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
335 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
336 * filtering will be disabled.
337 */
338#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
339
340/**
341 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
342 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
343 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
344 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
345 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
346 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
347 * once each time the timeout triggers.
348 */
349enum ieee80211_event_type {
350 RSSI_EVENT,
351 MLME_EVENT,
352 BAR_RX_EVENT,
353 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
354};
355
356/**
357 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
359 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
360 */
361enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
362 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
363 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
364};
365
366/**
367 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
368 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
369 */
370struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
371 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
372};
373
374/**
375 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
376 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
377 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
378 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
379 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
380 */
381enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
382 AUTH_EVENT,
383 ASSOC_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
385 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
386};
387
388/**
389 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
390 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
391 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
392 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
393 */
394enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
395 MLME_SUCCESS,
396 MLME_DENIED,
397 MLME_TIMEOUT,
398};
399
400/**
401 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
402 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
403 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
404 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
405 */
406struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
408 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
409 u16 reason;
410};
411
412/**
413 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
414 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
415 * @tid: the tid
416 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
417 */
418struct ieee80211_ba_event {
419 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
420 u16 tid;
421 u16 ssn;
422};
423
424/**
425 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
426 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
427 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
428 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
429 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
430 * @u:union holding the fields above
431 */
432struct ieee80211_event {
433 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
434 union {
435 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
437 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
438 } u;
439};
440
441/**
442 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
443 *
444 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
445 *
446 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
447 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
448 */
449struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
450 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
451 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
452};
453
454/**
455 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
456 *
457 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
458 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
459 *
460 * @assoc: association status
461 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
462 * or not
463 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
464 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
465 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
466 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
467 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
468 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
469 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
470 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
471 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
472 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
473 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
474 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
475 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
476 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
477 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
478 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
479 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
480 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
481 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
482 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
483 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
484 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
485 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
486 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
487 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
488 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
489 * the current band.
490 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
491 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
492 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
493 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
494 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
495 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
496 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
497 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
498 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
499 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
500 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
501 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
502 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
503 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
504 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
505 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
506 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
507 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
508 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
509 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
510 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
511 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
512 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
513 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
514 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
515 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
516 * your driver/device needs to do.
517 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
518 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
519 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
520 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
521 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
522 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
523 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
524 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
525 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
526 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
527 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
528 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
529 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
530 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
531 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
532 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
533 */
534struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
535 const u8 *bssid;
536 /* association related data */
537 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
538 bool ibss_creator;
539 u16 aid;
540 /* erp related data */
541 bool use_cts_prot;
542 bool use_short_preamble;
543 bool use_short_slot;
544 bool enable_beacon;
545 u8 dtim_period;
546 u16 beacon_int;
547 u16 assoc_capability;
548 u64 sync_tsf;
549 u32 sync_device_ts;
550 u8 sync_dtim_count;
551 u32 basic_rates;
552 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
553 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
554 u16 ht_operation_mode;
555 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
556 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
557 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
558 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
559 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
560 int arp_addr_cnt;
561 bool qos;
562 bool idle;
563 bool ps;
564 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
565 size_t ssid_len;
566 bool hidden_ssid;
567 int txpower;
568 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
569 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
570 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
571};
572
573/**
574 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
575 *
576 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
577 *
578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
579 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
580 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
581 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
582 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
583 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
584 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
585 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
586 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
587 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
588 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
589 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
592 * station
593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
597 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
598 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
599 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
600 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
601 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
602 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
603 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
604 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
605 * hardware queue.
606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
607 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
608 * is for the whole aggregation.
609 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
610 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
612 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
613 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
615 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
616 * off-channel operation.
617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
619 * it can be sent out.
620 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
621 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
624 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
625 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
626 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
628 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
629 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
630 * queue gets full.
631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
632 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
633 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
635 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
636 * should kick the MLME state machine.
637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
638 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
639 * status to user space)
640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
642 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
643 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
644 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
645 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
646 * handled properly by the device.
647 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
648 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
649 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
650 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
651 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
652 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
654 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
655 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
656 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
657 * PS-Poll responses.
658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
659 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
660 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
662 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
663 * monitor injection).
664 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
665 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
666 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
667 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
668 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
669 *
670 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
671 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
672 */
673enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
685 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
701 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
705};
706
707#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
708
709/**
710 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
711 *
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
713 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
715 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
718 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
719 *
720 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
721 */
722enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
725 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
726 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
727 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
728};
729
730/*
731 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
732 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
733 */
734#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
737 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
738 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
739 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
742
743/**
744 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
745 * Rate Control algorithm.
746 *
747 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
748 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
749 *
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
752 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
756 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
758 * Greenfield mode.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
761 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
762 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
764 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
765 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
767 */
768enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
771 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
772
773 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
782};
783
784
785/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
786#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
787
788/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
789#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
790
791/* maximum number of rate stages */
792#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
793
794/* maximum number of rate table entries */
795#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
796
797/**
798 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
799 *
800 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
801 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
802 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
803 *
804 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
805 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
806 *
807 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
808 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
809 *
810 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
811 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
812 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
813 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
814 * information::
815 *
816 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
817 *
818 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
819 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
820 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
821 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
822 * information should then contain::
823 *
824 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
825 *
826 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
827 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
828 */
829struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
830 s8 idx;
831 u16 count:5,
832 flags:11;
833} __packed;
834
835#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
836
837static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
838 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
839{
840 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
841 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
842 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
843}
844
845static inline u8
846ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
847{
848 return rate->idx & 0xF;
849}
850
851static inline u8
852ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
853{
854 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
855}
856
857/**
858 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
859 *
860 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
861 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
862 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
863 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
864 *
865 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
866 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
867 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
868 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
869 * @control: union for control data
870 * @status: union for status data
871 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
872 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
873 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
874 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
875 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
876 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
877 */
878struct ieee80211_tx_info {
879 /* common information */
880 u32 flags;
881 u8 band;
882
883 u8 hw_queue;
884
885 u16 ack_frame_id;
886
887 union {
888 struct {
889 union {
890 /* rate control */
891 struct {
892 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
893 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
894 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
895 u8 use_rts:1;
896 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
897 u8 short_preamble:1;
898 u8 skip_table:1;
899 /* 2 bytes free */
900 };
901 /* only needed before rate control */
902 unsigned long jiffies;
903 };
904 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
905 union {
906 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
907 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
908
909 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
910 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
911 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
912 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
913 * sojourn time computation.
914 */
915 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
916 };
917 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
918 u32 flags;
919 /* 4 bytes free */
920 } control;
921 struct {
922 u64 cookie;
923 } ack;
924 struct {
925 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
926 s32 ack_signal;
927 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
928 u8 ampdu_len;
929 u8 antenna;
930 u16 tx_time;
931 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
932 } status;
933 struct {
934 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
935 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
936 u8 pad[4];
937
938 void *rate_driver_data[
939 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
940 };
941 void *driver_data[
942 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
943 };
944};
945
946/**
947 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
948 *
949 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
950 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
951 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
952 *
953 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
954 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
955 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
956 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
957 */
958struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
959 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
960 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
961 const u8 *common_ies;
962 size_t common_ie_len;
963};
964
965
966static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
967{
968 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
969}
970
971static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
972{
973 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
974}
975
976/**
977 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
978 *
979 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
980 *
981 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
982 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
983 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
984 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
985 *
986 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
987 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
988 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
989 */
990static inline void
991ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
992{
993 int i;
994
995 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
996 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
997 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
998 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
999 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1000 /* clear the rate counts */
1001 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1002 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1003
1004 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1005 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1006 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1007 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1008 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1009}
1010
1011
1012/**
1013 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1014 *
1015 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1016 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1017 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1018 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1019 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1020 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1021 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
1022 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1023 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1024 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1025 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1026 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1027 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1028 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1029 * de-duplication by itself.
1030 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1031 * the frame.
1032 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1033 * the frame.
1034 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1035 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1036 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1037 * merging.
1038 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1039 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1040 * (including FCS) was received.
1041 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1042 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1043 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1044 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
1045 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
1046 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1047 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1048 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1049 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1050 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1051 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1052 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1053 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1054 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1055 * each A-MPDU
1056 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1057 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1058 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1059 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1060 * on this subframe
1061 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1062 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1063 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1064 * done by the hardware
1065 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1066 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1067 * processing it in any regular way.
1068 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1069 * them for sniffing purposes.
1070 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1071 * monitor interfaces.
1072 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1073 * them for sniffing purposes.
1074 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1075 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1076 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
1077 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1078 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1079 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1080 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1081 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1082 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1083 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1084 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1085 * interleaved with other frames.
1086 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1087 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1088 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1089 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1090 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1091 * the first subframe.
1092 */
1093enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1094 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1095 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1096 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1097 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1098 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1099 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1100 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1101 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1102 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1103 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1104 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1105 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1106 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1107 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1108 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
1109 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
1110 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
1111 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1112 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1113 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1114 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
1115 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
1116 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
1117 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
1118 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1119 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
1120 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
1121 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1122 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
1123 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
1124 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
1125 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1126 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
1127};
1128
1129#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1130
1131/**
1132 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1133 *
1134 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1135 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1136 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
1137 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
1138 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1139 */
1140
1141enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1142 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
1143 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1144 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
1145};
1146
1147/**
1148 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1149 *
1150 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1151 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1152 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1153 *
1154 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1155 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1156 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1157 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1158 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1159 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1160 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1161 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1162 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1163 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1164 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1165 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1166 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1167 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1168 * values were filled.
1169 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1170 * support dB or unspecified units)
1171 * @antenna: antenna used
1172 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1173 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1174 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
1175 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1176 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_\*
1177 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1178 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1179 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1180 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1181 */
1182struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1183 u64 mactime;
1184 u64 boottime_ns;
1185 u32 device_timestamp;
1186 u32 ampdu_reference;
1187 u64 flag;
1188 u16 freq;
1189 u8 vht_flag;
1190 u8 rate_idx;
1191 u8 vht_nss;
1192 u8 rx_flags;
1193 u8 band;
1194 u8 antenna;
1195 s8 signal;
1196 u8 chains;
1197 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1198 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1199};
1200
1201/**
1202 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1203 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1204 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1205 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1206 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1207 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1208 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1209 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1210 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1211 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1212 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1213 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1214 * @data field.
1215 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1216 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1217 * length
1218 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1219 *
1220 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1221 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1222 * data.
1223 */
1224struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1225 u32 present;
1226 u8 align;
1227 u8 oui[3];
1228 u8 subns;
1229 u8 pad;
1230 u16 len;
1231 u8 data[];
1232} __packed;
1233
1234/**
1235 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1236 *
1237 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1238 *
1239 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1240 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1241 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1242 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1243 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1244 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1245 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1246 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1247 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1248 * for more.
1249 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1250 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1251 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1252 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1253 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1254 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1255 * operating channel.
1256 */
1257enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1258 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1259 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1260 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1261 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1262};
1263
1264
1265/**
1266 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1267 *
1268 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1269 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1270 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1271 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1272 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1273 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1275 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1276 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1277 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1278 */
1279enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1280 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1281 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1282 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1283 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1284 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1285 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1286 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1287 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1288};
1289
1290/**
1291 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1292 *
1293 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1294 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1295 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1296 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1297 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1298 */
1299enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1300 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1301 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1302 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1303 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1304
1305 /* keep last */
1306 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1307};
1308
1309/**
1310 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1311 *
1312 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1313 *
1314 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1315 *
1316 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1317 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1318 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1319 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1320 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1321 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1322 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1323 *
1324 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1325 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1326 *
1327 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1328 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1329 *
1330 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1331 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1332 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1333 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1334 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1335 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1336 *
1337 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1338 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1339 * configured for an HT channel.
1340 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1341 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1342 */
1343struct ieee80211_conf {
1344 u32 flags;
1345 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1346
1347 u16 listen_interval;
1348 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1349
1350 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1351
1352 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1353 bool radar_enabled;
1354 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1355};
1356
1357/**
1358 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1359 *
1360 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1361 * operation.
1362 *
1363 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1364 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1365 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1366 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1367 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1368 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1369 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1370 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1371 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1372 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1373 */
1374struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1375 u64 timestamp;
1376 u32 device_timestamp;
1377 bool block_tx;
1378 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1379 u8 count;
1380};
1381
1382/**
1383 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1384 *
1385 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1386 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1387 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1388 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1389 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1390 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1391 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1392 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1393 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1394 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1395 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1396 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1397 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1398 */
1399enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1400 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1401 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1402 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1403 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1404};
1405
1406/**
1407 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1408 *
1409 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1410 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1411 *
1412 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1413 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1414 * or the BSS we're associated to
1415 * @addr: address of this interface
1416 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1417 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1418 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1419 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1420 * for read access.
1421 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1422 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1423 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1424 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1425 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1426 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1427 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1428 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1429 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1430 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1431 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1432 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1433 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1434 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1435 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1436 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1437 * interface.
1438 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1439 * sizeof(void \*).
1440 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1441 */
1442struct ieee80211_vif {
1443 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1444 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1445 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1446 bool p2p;
1447 bool csa_active;
1448 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1449
1450 u8 cab_queue;
1451 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1452
1453 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1454
1455 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1456
1457 u32 driver_flags;
1458
1459#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1460 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1461#endif
1462
1463 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1464
1465 /* must be last */
1466 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1467};
1468
1469static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1470{
1471#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1472 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1473#endif
1474 return false;
1475}
1476
1477/**
1478 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1479 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1480 *
1481 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1482 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1483 *
1484 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1485 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1486 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1487 */
1488struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1489
1490/**
1491 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1492 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1493 *
1494 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1495 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1496 *
1497 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1498 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1499 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1500 */
1501struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1502
1503/**
1504 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1505 *
1506 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1507 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1508 *
1509 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1510 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1511 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1512 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1513 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1514 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1515 * generation in software.
1516 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1517 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1518 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1519 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1520 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1521 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1522 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1523 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1524 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1525 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1526 * MIC.
1527 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1528 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1529 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1530 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1531 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1532 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1533 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1534 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1535 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1536 * only for managment frames (MFP).
1537 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1538 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1539 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1540 */
1541enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1542 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1543 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1544 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1545 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1546 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1547 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1548 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1549 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1550};
1551
1552/**
1553 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1554 *
1555 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1556 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1557 *
1558 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1559 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1560 * encrypted in hardware.
1561 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1562 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1563 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1564 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1565 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1566 * @keylen: key material length
1567 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1568 * data block:
1569 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1570 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1571 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1572 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1573 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1574 */
1575struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1576 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1577 u32 cipher;
1578 u8 icv_len;
1579 u8 iv_len;
1580 u8 hw_key_idx;
1581 u8 flags;
1582 s8 keyidx;
1583 u8 keylen;
1584 u8 key[0];
1585};
1586
1587#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1588
1589#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1590#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1591
1592/**
1593 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1594 *
1595 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1596 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1597 * reverse order than in packet)
1598 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1599 * reverse order than in packet)
1600 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1601 * reverse order than in packet)
1602 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1603 * reverse order than in packet)
1604 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1605 */
1606struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1607 union {
1608 struct {
1609 u32 iv32;
1610 u16 iv16;
1611 } tkip;
1612 struct {
1613 u8 pn[6];
1614 } ccmp;
1615 struct {
1616 u8 pn[6];
1617 } aes_cmac;
1618 struct {
1619 u8 pn[6];
1620 } aes_gmac;
1621 struct {
1622 u8 pn[6];
1623 } gcmp;
1624 struct {
1625 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1626 u8 seq_len;
1627 } hw;
1628 };
1629};
1630
1631/**
1632 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1633 *
1634 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1635 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1636 *
1637 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1638 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1639 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1640 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1641 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1642 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1643 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1644 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1645 * key_idx value calculation:
1646 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1647 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1648 */
1649struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1650 u32 cipher;
1651 u16 iftype;
1652 u8 hdr_len;
1653 u8 pn_len;
1654 u8 pn_off;
1655 u8 key_idx_off;
1656 u8 key_idx_mask;
1657 u8 key_idx_shift;
1658 u8 mic_len;
1659};
1660
1661/**
1662 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1663 *
1664 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1665 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1666 *
1667 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1668 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1669 */
1670enum set_key_cmd {
1671 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1672};
1673
1674/**
1675 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1676 *
1677 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1678 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1679 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1680 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1681 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1682 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1683 */
1684enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1685 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1686 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1687 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1688 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1689 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1690 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1691};
1692
1693/**
1694 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1695 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1696 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1697 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1699 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1700 *
1701 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1702 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1703 */
1704enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1705 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1706 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1707 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1708 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1709};
1710
1711/**
1712 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1713 *
1714 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1715 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1716 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1717 */
1718struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1719 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1720 struct {
1721 s8 idx;
1722 u8 count;
1723 u8 count_cts;
1724 u8 count_rts;
1725 u16 flags;
1726 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1727};
1728
1729/**
1730 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1731 *
1732 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1733 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1734 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1735 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1736 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1737 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1738 *
1739 * @addr: MAC address
1740 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1741 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1742 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1743 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1744 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1745 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1746 * Can be modified by driver.
1747 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1748 * otherwise always false)
1749 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1750 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1751 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1752 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1753 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1754 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1755 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1756 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1757 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1758 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1759 * the station moves to associated state.
1760 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1761 * @rates: rate control selection table
1762 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1763 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1764 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1765 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1766 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1767 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1768 * unlimited.
1769 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1770 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1771 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1772 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1773 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1774 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1775 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1776 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1777 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1778 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1779 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1780 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1781 */
1782struct ieee80211_sta {
1783 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1784 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1785 u16 aid;
1786 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1787 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1788 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1789 bool wme;
1790 u8 uapsd_queues;
1791 u8 max_sp;
1792 u8 rx_nss;
1793 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1794 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1795 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1796 bool tdls;
1797 bool tdls_initiator;
1798 bool mfp;
1799 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1800 u16 max_amsdu_len;
1801 bool support_p2p_ps;
1802 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
1803
1804 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1805
1806 /* must be last */
1807 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1808};
1809
1810/**
1811 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1812 *
1813 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1814 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
1815 *
1816 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1817 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1818 */
1819enum sta_notify_cmd {
1820 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1821};
1822
1823/**
1824 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1825 *
1826 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1827 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1828 */
1829struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1830 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1831};
1832
1833/**
1834 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1835 *
1836 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1837 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1838 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1839 * @ac: the AC for this queue
1840 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
1841 *
1842 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1843 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1844 */
1845struct ieee80211_txq {
1846 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1847 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1848 u8 tid;
1849 u8 ac;
1850
1851 /* must be last */
1852 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1853};
1854
1855/**
1856 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1857 *
1858 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1859 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1860 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1861 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1862 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1863 *
1864 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1865 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1866 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1867 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1868 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1869 * algorithm.
1870 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1871 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1872 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1873 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1874 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1875 * CCK frames.
1876 *
1877 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1878 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1879 * the FCS at the end.
1880 *
1881 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1882 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1883 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1884 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1885 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1886 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
1887 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
1888 *
1889 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1890 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1891 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1892 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1893 *
1894 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1895 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1896 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1897 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1898 *
1899 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1900 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1901 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
1902 *
1903 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1904 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
1905 *
1906 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1907 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1908 *
1909 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1910 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1911 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1912 *
1913 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1914 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
1915 *
1916 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1917 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
1918 *
1919 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1920 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1921 * the stack.
1922 *
1923 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
1924 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1925 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1926 *
1927 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1928 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1929 * dtim_period).
1930 *
1931 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1932 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1933 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1934 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1935 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1936 * only in that case.
1937 *
1938 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1939 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1940 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1941 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1942 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1943 * the PS mode of connected stations.
1944 *
1945 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1946 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1947 * software.
1948 *
1949 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1950 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1951 * active interfaces.
1952 *
1953 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1954 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1955 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1956 *
1957 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1958 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1959 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1960 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1961 * supported cipher suites.
1962 *
1963 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1964 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1965 * for frames.
1966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1968 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1969 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1970 * control for more details.
1971 *
1972 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1973 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1974 *
1975 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1976 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1977 * is supported.
1978 *
1979 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1980 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
1981 *
1982 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1983 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1984 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1985 *
1986 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1987 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1988 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1989 * CSA frame.
1990 *
1991 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1992 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1993 *
1994 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1995 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
1996 *
1997 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1998 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1999 *
2000 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2001 * within A-MPDU.
2002 *
2003 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2004 * for sent beacons.
2005 *
2006 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2007 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2008 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2009 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2010 *
2011 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2012 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2013 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2014 * timeout.
2015 *
2016 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2017 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2018 *
2019 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2020 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2021 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2022 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2023 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2024 *
2025 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2026 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2027 *
2028 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2029 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2030 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2031 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2032 *
2033 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2034 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2035 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2036 *
2037 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2038 */
2039enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2040 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2041 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2042 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2043 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2045 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2046 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2047 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2048 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2049 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2050 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2053 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2054 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2055 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2058 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2059 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2061 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2062 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2063 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2064 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2066 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2067 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2068 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2069 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2072 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2073 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2079
2080 /* keep last, obviously */
2081 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2082};
2083
2084/**
2085 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2086 *
2087 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2088 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2089 *
2090 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2091 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2092 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2093 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2094 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2095 *
2096 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2097 *
2098 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2099 * along with this structure.
2100 *
2101 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2102 *
2103 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2104 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2105 *
2106 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2107 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2108 *
2109 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2110 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2111 *
2112 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2113 * that HW supports
2114 *
2115 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2116 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2117 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2118 *
2119 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2120 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2121 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2122 *
2123 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2124 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2125 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2126 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2127 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2128 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2129 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2130 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2131 *
2132 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2133 * can handle.
2134 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2135 * the hw can report back.
2136 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2137 *
2138 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2139 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2140 * aggregation.
2141 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2142 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2143 * it shouldn't be set.
2144 *
2145 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2146 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2147 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2148 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2149 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2150 *
2151 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2152 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2153 *
2154 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2155 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2156 *
2157 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2158 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2159 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2160 * adding _BW is supported today.
2161 *
2162 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2163 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2164 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2165 *
2166 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2167 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2168 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2169 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2170 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2171 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2172 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2173 *
2174 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2175 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2176 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2177 *
2178 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2179 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2180 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2181 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2182 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2183 * neither enabled.
2184 *
2185 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2186 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2187 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2188 *
2189 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2190 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2191 * supported by HW.
2192 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2193 * device.
2194 */
2195struct ieee80211_hw {
2196 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2197 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2198 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2199 void *priv;
2200 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2201 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2202 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2203 int vif_data_size;
2204 int sta_data_size;
2205 int chanctx_data_size;
2206 int txq_data_size;
2207 u16 queues;
2208 u16 max_listen_interval;
2209 s8 max_signal;
2210 u8 max_rates;
2211 u8 max_report_rates;
2212 u8 max_rate_tries;
2213 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2214 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2215 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2216 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2217 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2218 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2219 struct {
2220 int units_pos;
2221 s16 accuracy;
2222 } radiotap_timestamp;
2223 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2224 u8 uapsd_queues;
2225 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2226 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2227 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2228 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2229};
2230
2231static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2232 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2233{
2234 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2235}
2236#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2237
2238static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2239 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2240{
2241 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2242}
2243#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2244
2245/**
2246 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2247 *
2248 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2249 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2250 */
2251struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2252 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2253
2254 /* Keep last */
2255 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2256};
2257
2258/**
2259 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2260 *
2261 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2262 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2263 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2264 * @status: channel-switch response status
2265 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2266 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2267 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2268 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2269 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2270 */
2271struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2273 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2274 u8 action_code;
2275 u32 status;
2276 u32 timestamp;
2277 u16 switch_time;
2278 u16 switch_timeout;
2279 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2280 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2281};
2282
2283/**
2284 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2285 *
2286 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2287 *
2288 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2289 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2290 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2291 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2292 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2293 *
2294 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2295 */
2296struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2297
2298/**
2299 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2300 *
2301 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2302 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2303 */
2304static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2305{
2306 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2307}
2308
2309/**
2310 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2311 *
2312 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2313 * @addr: the address to set
2314 */
2315static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2316{
2317 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2318}
2319
2320static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2321ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2322 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2323{
2324 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2325 return NULL;
2326 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2327}
2328
2329static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2330ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2331 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2332{
2333 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2334 return NULL;
2335 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2336}
2337
2338static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2339ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2340 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2341{
2342 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2343 return NULL;
2344 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2345}
2346
2347/**
2348 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2349 * @hw: the hardware
2350 * @skb: the skb
2351 *
2352 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2353 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2354 */
2355void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2356
2357/**
2358 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2359 *
2360 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2361 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2362 *
2363 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2364 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2365 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2366 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2367 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2368 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2369 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2370 *
2371 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2372 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2373 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2374 *
2375 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2376 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2377 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2378 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2379 *
2380 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2381 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2382 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2383 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2384 *
2385 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2386 *
2387 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2388 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2389 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2390 * based on the receive flags.
2391 *
2392 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2393 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2394 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2395 * keys.
2396 *
2397 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2398 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2399 * handler.
2400 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2401 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2402 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2403 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2404 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2405 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2406 *
2407 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2408 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2409 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2410 */
2411
2412/**
2413 * DOC: Powersave support
2414 *
2415 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2416 *
2417 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2418 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2419 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2420 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2421 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2422 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2423 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2424 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2425 *
2426 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2427 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2428 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2429 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2430 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2431 *
2432 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2433 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2434 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2435 *
2436 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2437 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2438 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2439 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2440 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2441 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2442 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2443 *
2444 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2445 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2446 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2447 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2448 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2449 * periods.
2450 *
2451 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2452 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2453 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2454 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2455 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2456 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2457 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2458 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2459 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2460 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2461 *
2462 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2463 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2464 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2465 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2466 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2467 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2468 *
2469 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2470 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2471 */
2472
2473/**
2474 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2475 *
2476 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2477 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2478 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2479 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2480 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2481 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2482 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2483 *
2484 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2485 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2486 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2487 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2488 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2489 *
2490 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2491 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2492 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2493 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2494 *
2495 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2496 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2497 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2498 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2499 *
2500 * - a list of information element IDs
2501 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2502 *
2503 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2504 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2505 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2506 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2507 * vendor information elements.
2508 *
2509 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2510 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2511 *
2512 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2513 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2514 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2515 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2516 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2517 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2518 *
2519 *
2520 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2521 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2522 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2523 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2524 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2525 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2526 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2527 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2528 *
2529 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2530 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2531 * signal strength threshold checking.
2532 */
2533
2534/**
2535 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2536 *
2537 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2538 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2539 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2540 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2541 *
2542 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2543 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2544 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2545 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2546 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2547 * hardware flags.
2548 *
2549 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2550 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2551 * turned off otherwise.
2552 *
2553 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2554 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2555 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2556 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2557 */
2558
2559/**
2560 * DOC: Frame filtering
2561 *
2562 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2563 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2564 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2565 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2566 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2567 *
2568 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2569 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2570 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2571 *
2572 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2573 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2574 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2575 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2576 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2577 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2578 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2579 *
2580 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2581 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2582 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2583 * or dropped.
2584 *
2585 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2586 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2587 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2588 * the flag, but not clear it.
2589 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2590 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2591 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2592 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2593 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2594 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2595 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2596 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2597 */
2598
2599/**
2600 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2601 *
2602 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2603 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2604 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2605 *
2606 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2607 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2608 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2609 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2610 * the driver code.
2611 *
2612 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2613 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2614 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2615 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2616 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2617 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2618 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2619 *
2620 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2621 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2622 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2623 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2624 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2625 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2626 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2627 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2628 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2629 * @sta_notify callback.
2630 *
2631 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2632 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2633 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2634 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2635 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2636 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2637 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2638 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2639 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2640 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2641 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2642 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2643 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2644 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2645 *
2646 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2647 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2648 *
2649 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2650 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2651 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2652 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2653 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2654 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2655 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2656 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2657 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2658 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2659 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2660 *
2661 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2662 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2663 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2664 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2665 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2666 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2667 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2668 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2669 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2670 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2671 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2672 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2673 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2674 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2675 *
2676 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2677 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2678 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2679 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2680 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2681 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2682 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2683 *
2684 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2685 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2686 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2687 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2688 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2689 *
2690 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2691 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2692 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2693 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2694 */
2695
2696/**
2697 * DOC: HW queue control
2698 *
2699 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2700 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2701 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2702 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2703 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2704 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2705 *
2706 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2707 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2708 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2709 *
2710 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2711 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2712 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2713 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2714 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2715 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2716 * the hardware queue.
2717 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2718 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2719 *
2720 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2721 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2722 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2723 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2724 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2725 *
2726 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2727 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2728 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2729 * off-channel queue: 9
2730 *
2731 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2732 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2733 *
2734 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2735 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2736 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2737 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2738 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2739 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2740 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2741 *
2742 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2743 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2744 *
2745 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2746 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2747 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2748 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2749 */
2750
2751/**
2752 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2753 *
2754 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2755 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2756 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2757 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2758 *
2759 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2760 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2761 * multicast address.
2762 *
2763 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2764 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2765 *
2766 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2767 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2768 *
2769 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2770 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2771 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2772 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2773 * honour this flag if possible.
2774 *
2775 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2776 * station
2777 *
2778 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
2779 *
2780 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
2781 *
2782 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
2783 */
2784enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2785 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2786 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2787 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2788 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2789 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2790 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
2791 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
2792 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
2793};
2794
2795/**
2796 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2797 *
2798 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2799 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
2800 *
2801 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2802 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
2803 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
2804 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2805 *
2806 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2807 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2808 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
2809 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
2810 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2811 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2812 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2813 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2814 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2815 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2816 * session is gone and removes the station.
2817 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2818 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2819 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2820 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
2821 */
2822enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2823 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2824 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
2825 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
2826 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2827 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2828 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
2829 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
2830};
2831
2832/**
2833 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2834 *
2835 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2836 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2837 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2838 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2839 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2840 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2841 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2842 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2843 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2844 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2845 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2846 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2847 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2848 */
2849struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2850 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2851 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2852 u16 tid;
2853 u16 ssn;
2854 u8 buf_size;
2855 bool amsdu;
2856 u16 timeout;
2857};
2858
2859/**
2860 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2861 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
2862 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2863 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
2864 */
2865enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2866 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
2867 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
2868};
2869
2870/**
2871 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2872 *
2873 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
2874 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2875 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2876 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
2877 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
2878 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2879 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2880 * the peer.
2881 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2882 * by the peer
2883 */
2884enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2885 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2886 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
2887 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
2888 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
2889};
2890
2891/**
2892 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2893 *
2894 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2895 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2896 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2897 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2898 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2899 *
2900 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2901 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2902 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2903 */
2904enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2905 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2906 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2907};
2908
2909/**
2910 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2911 *
2912 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2913 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2914 *
2915 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2916 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2917 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2918 * of wowlan configuration)
2919 */
2920enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2921 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2922 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2923};
2924
2925/**
2926 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2927 *
2928 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2929 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2930 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2931 *
2932 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2933 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2934 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
2935 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
2936 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
2937 * Must be atomic.
2938 *
2939 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2940 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2941 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2942 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2943 * or zero.
2944 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2945 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2946 * is added.
2947 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2948 *
2949 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2950 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2951 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2952 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
2953 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2954 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
2955 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2956 *
2957 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2958 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2959 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2960 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2961 * reconfigured at resume time.
2962 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2963 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2964 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2965 * must return 1 from this function.
2966 *
2967 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2968 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2969 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2970 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2971 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2972 *
2973 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2974 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2975 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2976 * in suspend().
2977 *
2978 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
2979 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
2980 * and @stop must be implemented.
2981 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2982 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2983 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2984 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2985 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
2986 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
2987 *
2988 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2989 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2990 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2991 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2992 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2993 *
2994 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2995 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2996 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2997 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2998 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2999 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3000 * MAC address of the device going away.
3001 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3002 *
3003 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3004 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3005 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3006 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3007 *
3008 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3009 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3010 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3011 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3012 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3013 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3014 * can sleep.
3015 *
3016 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3017 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3018 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3019 *
3020 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3021 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3022 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3023 *
3024 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3025 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3026 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3027 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3028 * which flags are changed.
3029 * This callback can sleep.
3030 *
3031 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3032 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3033 *
3034 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3035 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3036 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3037 * is enabled.
3038 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3039 * The callback can sleep.
3040 *
3041 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3042 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3043 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3044 * The callback must be atomic.
3045 *
3046 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3047 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3048 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3049 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3050 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3051 *
3052 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3053 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3054 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3055 *
3056 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3057 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3058 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3059 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3060 * that power save is disabled.
3061 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3062 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3063 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3064 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3065 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3066 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3067 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3068 * The callback can sleep.
3069 *
3070 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3071 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3072 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3073 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3074 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3075 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3076 * The callback can sleep.
3077 *
3078 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3079 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3080 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3081 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3082 *
3083 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3084 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3085 *
3086 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3087 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3088 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3089 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3090 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3091 *
3092 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3093 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3094 * this notification.
3095 * The callback can sleep.
3096 *
3097 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3098 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3099 * The callback can sleep.
3100 *
3101 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3102 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3103 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3104 * The callback must be atomic.
3105 *
3106 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3107 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3108 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3109 * should be set as well.
3110 * The callback can sleep.
3111 *
3112 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3113 * The callback can sleep.
3114 *
3115 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3116 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3117 *
3118 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3119 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3120 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3121 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3122 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3123 * This callback can sleep.
3124 *
3125 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3126 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3127 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3128 * callback can sleep.
3129 *
3130 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3131 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3132 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3133 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3134 *
3135 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3136 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3137 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3138 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3139 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3140 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3141 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3142 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3143 * The callback can sleep.
3144 *
3145 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3146 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3147 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3148 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3149 * in @sta_state.
3150 * The callback can sleep.
3151 *
3152 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3153 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3154 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3155 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3156 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3157 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3158 * Must be atomic.
3159 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3160 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3161 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3162 *
3163 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3164 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3165 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3166 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3167 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3168 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3169 * The callback can sleep.
3170 *
3171 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3172 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3173 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3174 * The callback can sleep.
3175 *
3176 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3177 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3178 * required function.
3179 * The callback can sleep.
3180 *
3181 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3182 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3183 * required function.
3184 * The callback can sleep.
3185 *
3186 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3187 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3188 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3189 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3190 * The callback can sleep.
3191 *
3192 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3193 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3194 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3195 * TSF synchronization.
3196 * The callback can sleep.
3197 *
3198 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3199 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3200 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3201 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3202 * The callback can sleep.
3203 *
3204 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3205 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3206 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3207 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3208 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3209 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3210 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3211 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3212 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3213 * - TX: 1.....7
3214 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3215 * - TX: 8..1...
3216 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3217 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3218 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3219 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3220 *
3221 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3222 * The callback can sleep.
3223 *
3224 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3225 *
3226 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3227 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3228 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3229 * The callback can sleep.
3230 *
3231 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3232 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3233 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3234 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3235 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3236 *
3237 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3238 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3239 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3240 *
3241 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3242 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3243 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3244 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3245 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3246 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3247 * The callback can sleep.
3248 *
3249 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3250 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3251 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3252 * completion of the channel switch.
3253 *
3254 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3255 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3256 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3257 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3258 *
3259 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3260 *
3261 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3262 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3263 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3264 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3265 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3266 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3267 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3268 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3269 * must be accepted in this case.
3270 * This callback may sleep.
3271 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3272 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3273 *
3274 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3275 *
3276 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3277 *
3278 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3279 * queues before entering power save.
3280 *
3281 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3282 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3283 * The callback can sleep.
3284 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3285 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3286 * The callback must be atomic.
3287 *
3288 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3289 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3290 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3291 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3292 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3293 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3294 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3295 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3296 * more-data bit must always be set.
3297 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3298 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3299 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3300 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3301 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3302 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3303 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3304 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3305 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3306 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3307 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3308 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3309 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3310 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3311 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3312 * This callback must be atomic.
3313 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3314 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3315 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3316 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3317 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3318 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3319 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3320 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3321 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3322 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3323 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3324 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3325 * This callback must be atomic.
3326 *
3327 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3328 *
3329 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3330 *
3331 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3332 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3333 *
3334 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3335 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3336 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3337 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3338 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3339 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3340 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3341 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3342 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3343 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3344 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3345 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3346 *
3347 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3348 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3349 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3350 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3351 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3352 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3353 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3354 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3355 *
3356 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3357 * This callback may sleep.
3358 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3359 * This callback may sleep.
3360 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3361 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3362 * channel context with different settings
3363 * This callback may sleep.
3364 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3365 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3366 * This callback may sleep.
3367 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3368 * unbound from vif.
3369 * This callback may sleep.
3370 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3371 * another, as specified in the list of
3372 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3373 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3374 * This callback may sleep.
3375 *
3376 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3377 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3378 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3379 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3380 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3381 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3382 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3383 *
3384 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3385 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3386 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3387 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3388 * This callback may sleep.
3389 *
3390 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3391 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3392 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3393 *
3394 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3395 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3396 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3397 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3398 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3399 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3400 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3401 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3402 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3403 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3404 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3405 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3406 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3407 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3408 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3409 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3410 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3411 *
3412 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3413 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3414 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3415 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3416 *
3417 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3418 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3419 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3420 *
3421 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3422 * and hardware limits.
3423 *
3424 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3425 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3426 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3427 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3428 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3429 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3430 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3431 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3432 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3433 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3434 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3435 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3436 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3437 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3438 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3439 * the function call.
3440 *
3441 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3442 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3443 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3444 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3445 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3446 *
3447 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3448 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3449 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3450 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3451 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3452 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3453 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3454 * changed parameters.
3455 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3456 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3457 * this call.
3458 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3459 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3460 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3461 */
3462struct ieee80211_ops {
3463 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3464 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3465 struct sk_buff *skb);
3466 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3467 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3468#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3469 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3470 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3471 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3472#endif
3473 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3475 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3476 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3477 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3478 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3480 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3481 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3482 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3483 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3484 u32 changed);
3485
3486 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3487 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3488
3489 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3490 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3491 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 unsigned int changed_flags,
3493 unsigned int *total_flags,
3494 u64 multicast);
3495 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3496 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3497 unsigned int filter_flags,
3498 unsigned int changed_flags);
3499 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3500 bool set);
3501 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3503 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3504 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3506 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3507 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3508 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3509 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3511 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3512 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3514 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3515 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3516 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3518 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3520 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3521 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3522 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3524 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3526 const u8 *mac_addr);
3527 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3529 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3530 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3531 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3533 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3534 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3535 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3536 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3537 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3538 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3540#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3541 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3542 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3543 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3544 struct dentry *dir);
3545#endif
3546 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3547 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3548 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3549 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3550 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3551 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3552 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3554 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3555 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3556 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3557 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3558 u32 changed);
3559 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3561 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3562 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3564 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3565 struct station_info *sinfo);
3566 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3567 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3568 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3569 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3570 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3571 u64 tsf);
3572 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3573 s64 offset);
3574 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3575 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3576 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3578 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3579 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3580 struct survey_info *survey);
3581 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3582 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3583#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3584 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3585 void *data, int len);
3586 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3587 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3588 void *data, int len);
3589#endif
3590 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3591 u32 queues, bool drop);
3592 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3593 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3594 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3595 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3596 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3597
3598 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3600 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3601 int duration,
3602 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3603 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3604 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3605 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3606 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3607 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3608 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3609 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3610 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3611 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3612 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3613
3614 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3615 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3616 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3617 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3618 bool more_data);
3619 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3620 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3621 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3622 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3623 bool more_data);
3624
3625 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3626 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3627 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3629 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3630 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3631 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3632 u32 sset, u8 *data);
3633
3634 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3636
3637 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3639
3640 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3641 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3642 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3643 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3644 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3645 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3646 u32 changed);
3647 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3648 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3649 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3650 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3651 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3652 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3653 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3654 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3655 int n_vifs,
3656 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3657
3658 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3659 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3660
3661#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3662 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3663 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3664 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3665#endif
3666 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3668 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3669 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3671 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3672
3673 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3675
3676 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3677 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3678 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3679 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3680 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3681 int *dbm);
3682
3683 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3684 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3686 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
3687 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
3688 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3689 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3690 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3691 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3692 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3693 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
3694
3695 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3696 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
3697 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3698
3699 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3700 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3701 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3702 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3703 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3704 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3706 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
3707 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3709 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3710 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3711 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3712 u8 instance_id);
3713};
3714
3715/**
3716 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3717 *
3718 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3719 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3720 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3721 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3722 * @priv_data_len.
3723 *
3724 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3725 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3726 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3727 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3728 *
3729 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3730 */
3731struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3732 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3733 const char *requested_name);
3734
3735/**
3736 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
3737 *
3738 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3739 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3740 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3741 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3742 * @priv_data_len.
3743 *
3744 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3745 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3746 *
3747 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3748 */
3749static inline
3750struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
3751 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3752{
3753 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3754}
3755
3756/**
3757 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3758 *
3759 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3760 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3761 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
3762 *
3763 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
3764 *
3765 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
3766 */
3767int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3768
3769/**
3770 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3771 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3772 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3773 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3774 */
3775struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3776 int throughput;
3777 int blink_time;
3778};
3779
3780/**
3781 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3782 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3783 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3784 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3785 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3786 */
3787enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3788 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3789 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3790 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3791};
3792
3793#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3794const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3795const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3796const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3797const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3798const char *
3799__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 unsigned int flags,
3801 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3802 unsigned int blink_table_len);
3803#endif
3804/**
3805 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3806 *
3807 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3808 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3809 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3810 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3811 *
3812 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3813 *
3814 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3815 */
3816static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3817{
3818#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3819 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3820#else
3821 return NULL;
3822#endif
3823}
3824
3825/**
3826 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3827 *
3828 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3829 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3830 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3831 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3832 *
3833 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3834 *
3835 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3836 */
3837static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3838{
3839#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3840 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3841#else
3842 return NULL;
3843#endif
3844}
3845
3846/**
3847 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3848 *
3849 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3850 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3851 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3852 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3853 *
3854 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3855 *
3856 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3857 */
3858static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3859{
3860#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3861 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3862#else
3863 return NULL;
3864#endif
3865}
3866
3867/**
3868 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3869 *
3870 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3871 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3872 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3873 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3874 *
3875 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3876 *
3877 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3878 */
3879static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3880{
3881#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3882 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3883#else
3884 return NULL;
3885#endif
3886}
3887
3888/**
3889 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3890 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
3891 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
3892 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3893 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3894 *
3895 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3896 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3897 *
3898 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
3899 */
3900static inline const char *
3901ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
3902 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3903 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3904{
3905#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3906 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
3907 blink_table_len);
3908#else
3909 return NULL;
3910#endif
3911}
3912
3913/**
3914 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3915 *
3916 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3917 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3918 *
3919 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3920 */
3921void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3922
3923/**
3924 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3925 *
3926 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3927 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
3928 * before calling this function.
3929 *
3930 * @hw: the hardware to free
3931 */
3932void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3933
3934/**
3935 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3936 *
3937 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3938 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3939 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3940 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3941 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3942 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3943 *
3944 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3945 */
3946void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3947
3948/**
3949 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
3950 *
3951 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3952 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3953 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3954 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3955 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3956 *
3957 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3958 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3959 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3960 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3961 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3962 *
3963 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3964 *
3965 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3966 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
3967 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3968 * @napi: the NAPI context
3969 */
3970void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3971 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
3972
3973/**
3974 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3975 *
3976 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3977 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3978 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3979 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3980 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3981 *
3982 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3983 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3984 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3985 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3986 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3987 *
3988 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
3989 *
3990 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3991 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3992 */
3993static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3994{
3995 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
3996}
3997
3998/**
3999 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4000 *
4001 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4002 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4003 *
4004 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4005 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4006 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4007 *
4008 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4009 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4010 */
4011void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4012
4013/**
4014 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4015 *
4016 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4017 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4018 *
4019 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4020 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4021 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4022 *
4023 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4024 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4025 */
4026static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4027 struct sk_buff *skb)
4028{
4029 local_bh_disable();
4030 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4031 local_bh_enable();
4032}
4033
4034/**
4035 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4036 *
4037 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4038 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4039 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4040 *
4041 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4042 *
4043 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4044 * each other.
4045 *
4046 * @sta: currently connected sta
4047 * @start: start or stop PS
4048 *
4049 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4050 */
4051int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4052
4053/**
4054 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4055 * (in process context)
4056 *
4057 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4058 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4059 * applies.
4060 *
4061 * @sta: currently connected sta
4062 * @start: start or stop PS
4063 *
4064 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4065 */
4066static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4067 bool start)
4068{
4069 int ret;
4070
4071 local_bh_disable();
4072 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4073 local_bh_enable();
4074
4075 return ret;
4076}
4077
4078/**
4079 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4080 * @sta: currently connected station
4081 *
4082 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4083 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4084 * connected station was received.
4085 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4086 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4087 * be serialized.
4088 */
4089void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4090
4091/**
4092 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4093 * @sta: currently connected station
4094 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4095 *
4096 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4097 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4098 * from a connected station was received.
4099 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4100 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4101 * serialized.
4102 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4103 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4104 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4105 * checks.
4106 */
4107void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4108
4109/*
4110 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4111 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4112 */
4113#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
4114
4115/**
4116 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4117 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4118 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4119 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4120 *
4121 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4122 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4123 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4124 *
4125 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4126 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4127 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4128 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4129 *
4130 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4131 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4132 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4133 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4134 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4135 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4136 *
4137 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4138 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4139 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4140 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4141 * use this API.
4142 */
4143void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4144 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4145
4146/**
4147 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4148 *
4149 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4150 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4151 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4152 *
4153 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4154 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4155 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4156 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4157 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4158 */
4159void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4160 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4161 struct sk_buff *skb,
4162 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4163 int max_rates);
4164
4165/**
4166 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4167 *
4168 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4169 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4170 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4171 *
4172 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4173 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4174 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4175 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4176 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4177 *
4178 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4179 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4180 */
4181void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct sk_buff *skb);
4183
4184/**
4185 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4186 *
4187 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4188 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4189 * specific skbs.
4190 *
4191 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4192 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4193 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4194 *
4195 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4196 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4197 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4198 * @info: tx status information
4199 */
4200void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4201 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4202 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4203
4204/**
4205 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4206 *
4207 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4208 *
4209 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4210 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4211 * for a single hardware.
4212 *
4213 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4214 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4215 */
4216static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4217 struct sk_buff *skb)
4218{
4219 local_bh_disable();
4220 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4221 local_bh_enable();
4222}
4223
4224/**
4225 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4226 *
4227 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4228 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4229 *
4230 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4231 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4232 *
4233 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4234 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4235 */
4236void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4237 struct sk_buff *skb);
4238
4239/**
4240 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4241 *
4242 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4243 * connected STA.
4244 *
4245 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4246 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4247 */
4248void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4249
4250#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4251
4252/**
4253 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4254 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4255 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4256 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4257 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4258 * should be ignored.
4259 */
4260struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4261 u16 tim_offset;
4262 u16 tim_length;
4263
4264 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4265};
4266
4267/**
4268 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4269 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4270 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4271 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4272 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4273 *
4274 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4275 * obtain the beacon template.
4276 *
4277 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4278 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4279 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4280 * applicable, the CSA count.
4281 *
4282 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4283 *
4284 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4285 */
4286struct sk_buff *
4287ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4289 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4290
4291/**
4292 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4293 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4295 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4296 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4297 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4298 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4299 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4300 *
4301 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4302 * obtain the beacon frame.
4303 *
4304 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4305 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4306 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4307 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4308 *
4309 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4310 *
4311 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4312 */
4313struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4315 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4316
4317/**
4318 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4319 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4320 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4321 *
4322 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4323 *
4324 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4325 */
4326static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4327 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4328{
4329 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4330}
4331
4332/**
4333 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4334 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4335 *
4336 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4337 * This function is called implicitly when
4338 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4339 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4340 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4341 *
4342 * Return: new csa counter value
4343 */
4344u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4345
4346/**
4347 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4348 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4349 *
4350 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4351 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4352 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4353 */
4354void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4355
4356/**
4357 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4359 *
4360 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4361 */
4362bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4363
4364
4365/**
4366 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4367 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4368 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4369 *
4370 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4371 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4372 *
4373 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4374 *
4375 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4376 */
4377struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4379
4380/**
4381 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4382 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4383 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4384 *
4385 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4386 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4387 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4388 *
4389 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4390 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4391 *
4392 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4393 */
4394struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4396
4397/**
4398 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4399 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4401 *
4402 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4403 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4404 * BSSID and address is used.
4405 *
4406 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4407 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4408 *
4409 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4410 */
4411struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4412 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4413
4414/**
4415 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4416 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4417 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4418 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4419 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4420 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4421 *
4422 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4423 * hardware.
4424 *
4425 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4426 */
4427struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4428 const u8 *src_addr,
4429 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4430 size_t tailroom);
4431
4432/**
4433 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4434 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4435 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4436 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4437 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4438 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4439 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4440 *
4441 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4442 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4443 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4444 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4445 */
4446void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4447 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4448 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4449 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4450
4451/**
4452 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4453 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4455 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4456 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4457 *
4458 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4459 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4460 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4461 *
4462 * Return: The duration.
4463 */
4464__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4465 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4466 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4467
4468/**
4469 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4470 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4471 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4472 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4473 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4474 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4475 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4476 *
4477 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4478 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4479 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4480 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4481 */
4482void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4484 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4485 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4486 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4487
4488/**
4489 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4490 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4491 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4492 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4493 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4494 *
4495 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4496 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4497 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4498 *
4499 * Return: The duration.
4500 */
4501__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4503 size_t frame_len,
4504 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4505
4506/**
4507 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4508 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4509 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4510 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4511 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4512 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4513 *
4514 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4515 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4516 *
4517 * Return: The duration.
4518 */
4519__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4521 enum nl80211_band band,
4522 size_t frame_len,
4523 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4524
4525/**
4526 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4527 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4529 *
4530 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4531 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4532 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4533 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4534 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4535 *
4536 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4537 * frames are available.
4538 *
4539 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4540 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4541 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4542 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4543 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4544 * use common code for all beacons.
4545 */
4546struct sk_buff *
4547ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4548
4549/**
4550 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4551 *
4552 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4553 *
4554 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4555 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4556 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4557 */
4558void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4559 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4560
4561/**
4562 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4563 *
4564 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4565 * from the given packet.
4566 *
4567 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4568 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4569 * with this P1K
4570 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4571 */
4572static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4573 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4574{
4575 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4576 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4577 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4578
4579 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4580}
4581
4582/**
4583 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4584 *
4585 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4586 * and transmitter address.
4587 *
4588 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4589 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4590 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4591 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4592 */
4593void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4594 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4595
4596/**
4597 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4598 *
4599 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4600 * in the packet.
4601 *
4602 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4603 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4604 * encrypted with this key
4605 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4606 */
4607void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4608 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
4609
4610/**
4611 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4612 *
4613 * @pos: start of crypto header
4614 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4615 * @pn: PN to add
4616 *
4617 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4618 * the packet payload)
4619 *
4620 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4621 * point to the crypto header)
4622 */
4623u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4624
4625/**
4626 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4627 *
4628 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4629 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4630 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4631 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4632 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4633 *
4634 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4635 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4636 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4637 *
4638 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4639 * can be done concurrently.
4640 */
4641void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4642 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4643
4644/**
4645 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4646 *
4647 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4648 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4649 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4650 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4651 * @seq: new sequence data
4652 *
4653 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4654 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4655 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4656 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4657 *
4658 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4659 * can be done concurrently.
4660 */
4661void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4662 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4663
4664/**
4665 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4666 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4667 *
4668 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4669 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4670 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4671 *
4672 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4673 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4674 */
4675void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4676
4677/**
4678 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4679 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4680 * @keyconf: new key data
4681 *
4682 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4683 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4684 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4685 *
4686 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4687 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4688 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4689 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4690 *
4691 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4692 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4693 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4694 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4695 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4696 * of the reconfiguration.
4697 *
4698 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4699 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4700 *
4701 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4702 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4703 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4704 * the key that's being replaced.
4705 */
4706struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4707ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4708 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4709
4710/**
4711 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4712 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4713 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4714 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4715 * @gfp: allocation flags
4716 */
4717void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4718 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4719
4720/**
4721 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4722 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4723 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4724 *
4725 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4726 */
4727void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4728
4729/**
4730 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4731 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4732 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4733 *
4734 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4735 */
4736void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4737
4738/**
4739 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4740 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4741 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4742 *
4743 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4744 *
4745 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
4746 */
4747
4748int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4749
4750/**
4751 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4752 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4753 *
4754 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4755 */
4756void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4757
4758/**
4759 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4760 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4761 *
4762 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4763 */
4764void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4765
4766/**
4767 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4768 *
4769 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4770 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
4771 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4772 * any context, including hardirq context.
4773 *
4774 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
4775 * @info: information about the completed scan
4776 */
4777void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4778 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
4779
4780/**
4781 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4782 *
4783 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4784 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4785 *
4786 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4787 */
4788void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4789
4790/**
4791 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4792 *
4793 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4794 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4795 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4796 * while associating, for instance.
4797 *
4798 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4799 */
4800void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4801
4802/**
4803 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4804 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4805 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4806 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4807 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4808 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4809 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4810 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4811 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
4812 */
4813enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4814 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4815 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4816 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
4817};
4818
4819/**
4820 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4821 *
4822 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4823 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4824 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4825 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4826 *
4827 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4828 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4829 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4830 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4831 */
4832void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4833 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4835 void *data);
4836
4837/**
4838 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
4839 *
4840 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4841 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4842 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4843 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4844 * be used.
4845 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4846 *
4847 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4848 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4849 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4850 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4851 */
4852static inline void
4853ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4854 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4855 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4856 void *data)
4857{
4858 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4859 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4860 iterator, data);
4861}
4862
4863/**
4864 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4865 *
4866 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4867 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4868 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4869 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
4870 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4871 *
4872 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4873 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4874 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4875 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4876 */
4877void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4878 u32 iter_flags,
4879 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4880 u8 *mac,
4881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4882 void *data);
4883
4884/**
4885 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4886 *
4887 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4888 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4889 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4890 *
4891 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4892 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4893 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4894 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4895 */
4896void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4897 u32 iter_flags,
4898 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4899 u8 *mac,
4900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4901 void *data);
4902
4903/**
4904 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4905 *
4906 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4907 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4908 * function for them.
4909 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4910 *
4911 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4912 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4913 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4914 */
4915void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4917 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4918 void *data);
4919/**
4920 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4921 *
4922 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4923 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4924 *
4925 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4926 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4927 */
4928void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4929
4930/**
4931 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4932 *
4933 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4934 * workqueue.
4935 *
4936 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4937 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4938 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4939 */
4940void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4941 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4942 unsigned long delay);
4943
4944/**
4945 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
4946 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
4947 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4948 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
4949 *
4950 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
4951 *
4952 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4953 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4954 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4955 */
4956int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4957 u16 timeout);
4958
4959/**
4960 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
4961 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4962 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4963 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4964 *
4965 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
4966 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4967 * from any context.
4968 */
4969void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
4970 u16 tid);
4971
4972/**
4973 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
4974 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
4975 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
4976 *
4977 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
4978 *
4979 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4980 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4981 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4982 */
4983int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
4984
4985/**
4986 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
4987 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4988 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4989 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4990 *
4991 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
4992 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4993 * can be called from any context.
4994 */
4995void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
4996 u16 tid);
4997
4998/**
4999 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5000 *
5001 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5002 * @addr: station's address
5003 *
5004 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5005 *
5006 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5007 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5008 */
5009struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5010 const u8 *addr);
5011
5012/**
5013 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5014 *
5015 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5016 * @addr: remote station's address
5017 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5018 *
5019 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5020 *
5021 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5022 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5023 *
5024 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5025 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5026 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5027 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5028 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5029 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5030 * is not reliable.
5031 *
5032 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5033 */
5034struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5035 const u8 *addr,
5036 const u8 *localaddr);
5037
5038/**
5039 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5040 * @hw: the hardware
5041 * @pubsta: the station
5042 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5043 *
5044 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5045 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5046 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5047 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5048 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5049 *
5050 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5051 * manner.
5052 *
5053 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5054 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5055 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5056 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5057 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5058 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5059 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5060 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5061 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5062 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5063 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5064 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5065 * woke up while blocked or not.
5066 */
5067void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5068 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5069
5070/**
5071 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5072 * @pubsta: the station
5073 *
5074 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5075 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5076 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5077 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5078 *
5079 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5080 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5081 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5082 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5083 *
5084 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5085 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5086 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5087 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5088 */
5089void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5090
5091/**
5092 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5093 * @pubsta: the station
5094 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5095 *
5096 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5097 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5098 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5099 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5100 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5101 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5102 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5103 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5104 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5105 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5106 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5107 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5108 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5109 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5110 */
5111void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5112
5113/**
5114 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5115 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5116 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5117 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5118 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5119 *
5120 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5121 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5122 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5123 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5124 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5125 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5126 *
5127 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5128 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5129 * set_key callback.
5130 */
5131void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5132 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5133 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5135 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5136 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5137 void *data),
5138 void *iter_data);
5139
5140/**
5141 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5143 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5144 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5145 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5146 *
5147 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5148 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5149 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5150 * in removal process will be skipped.
5151 *
5152 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5153 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5154 */
5155void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5157 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5159 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5160 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5161 void *data),
5162 void *iter_data);
5163
5164/**
5165 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5166 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5167 * @iter: iterator function
5168 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5169 *
5170 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5171 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5172 * places while calling into the driver.
5173 *
5174 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5175 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5176 * removed.
5177 *
5178 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5179 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5180 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5181 * or not.
5182 */
5183void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5184 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5185 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5186 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5187 void *data),
5188 void *iter_data);
5189
5190/**
5191 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5192 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5193 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5194 *
5195 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5196 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5197 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5198 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5199 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5200 * %NULL.
5201 *
5202 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5203 */
5204struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5206
5207/**
5208 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5209 *
5210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5211 *
5212 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5213 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5214 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5215 */
5216void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5217
5218/**
5219 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5220 *
5221 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5222 *
5223 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5224 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5225 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5226 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5227 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5228 *
5229 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5230 * without connection recovery attempts.
5231 */
5232void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5233
5234/**
5235 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5236 *
5237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5238 *
5239 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5240 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5241 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5242 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5243 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5244 *
5245 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5246 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5247 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5248 * disconnect normally later.
5249 *
5250 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5251 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5252 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5253 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5254 */
5255void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5256
5257/**
5258 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5259 * rssi threshold triggered
5260 *
5261 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5262 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5263 * @gfp: context flags
5264 *
5265 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5266 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5267 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5268 */
5269void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5270 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5271 gfp_t gfp);
5272
5273/**
5274 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5275 *
5276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5277 * @gfp: context flags
5278 */
5279void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5280
5281/**
5282 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5283 *
5284 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5285 */
5286void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5287
5288/**
5289 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5290 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5291 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5292 *
5293 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5294 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5295 */
5296void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5297
5298/**
5299 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5300 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5301 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5302 *
5303 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5304 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5305 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5306 */
5307void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5308 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5309
5310/**
5311 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5312 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5313 */
5314void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5315
5316/**
5317 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5318 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5319 */
5320void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5321
5322/**
5323 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5324 *
5325 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5326 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5327 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5328 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5329 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5330 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5331 *
5332 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5333 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5334 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5335 */
5336void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5337 const u8 *addr);
5338
5339/**
5340 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5341 * @pubsta: station struct
5342 * @tid: the session's TID
5343 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5344 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5345 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5346 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5347 *
5348 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5349 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5350 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5351 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5352 */
5353void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5354 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5355 u16 received_mpdus);
5356
5357/**
5358 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5359 *
5360 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5361 * buffer.
5362 *
5363 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5364 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5365 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5366 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5367 */
5368void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5369
5370/**
5371 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5372 *
5373 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5374 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5375 * reordering.
5376 *
5377 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5378 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5379 *
5380 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5381 * @addr: station mac address
5382 * @tid: the rx tid
5383 */
5384void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5385 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5386
5387/**
5388 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5389 *
5390 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5391 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5392 * reordering.
5393 *
5394 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5395 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5396 *
5397 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5398 * @addr: station mac address
5399 * @tid: the rx tid
5400 */
5401void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5402 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5403
5404/* Rate control API */
5405
5406/**
5407 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5408 *
5409 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5410 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5411 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5412 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5413 * to be filled in
5414 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5415 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5416 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5417 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5418 * RTS threshold
5419 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5420 * if the selected rate supports it
5421 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
5422 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5423 * rate_idx_mask)
5424 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5425 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5426 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5427 */
5428struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5429 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5430 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5431 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5432 struct sk_buff *skb;
5433 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5434 bool rts, short_preamble;
5435 u8 max_rate_idx;
5436 u32 rate_idx_mask;
5437 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5438 bool bss;
5439};
5440
5441struct rate_control_ops {
5442 const char *name;
5443 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5444 void (*free)(void *priv);
5445
5446 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5447 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5448 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5450 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5451 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5452 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5453 u32 changed);
5454 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5455 void *priv_sta);
5456
5457 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5458 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5459 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5460 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5461 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5462 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5463 struct sk_buff *skb);
5464 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5465 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5466
5467 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5468 struct dentry *dir);
5469 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5470
5471 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5472};
5473
5474static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5475 enum nl80211_band band,
5476 int index)
5477{
5478 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5479}
5480
5481/**
5482 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5483 *
5484 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5485 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5486 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5487 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5488 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5489 * not null.
5490 *
5491 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5492 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5493 *
5494 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5495 * that this may be null.
5496 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5497 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5498 */
5499bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5500 void *priv_sta,
5501 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5502
5503
5504static inline s8
5505rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5507{
5508 int i;
5509
5510 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5511 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5512 return i;
5513
5514 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5515 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5516
5517 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5518 return 0;
5519}
5520
5521static inline
5522bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5523 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5524{
5525 unsigned int i;
5526
5527 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5528 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5529 return true;
5530 return false;
5531}
5532
5533/**
5534 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5535 *
5536 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5537 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5538 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5539 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5540 *
5541 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5542 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5543 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5544 */
5545int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5546 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5547 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5548
5549int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5550void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5551
5552static inline bool
5553conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5554{
5555 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
5556}
5557
5558static inline bool
5559conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5560{
5561 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5562 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5563}
5564
5565static inline bool
5566conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5567{
5568 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5569 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5570}
5571
5572static inline bool
5573conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5574{
5575 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
5576}
5577
5578static inline bool
5579conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5580{
5581 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5582 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5583 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
5584}
5585
5586static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5587ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5588{
5589 if (p2p) {
5590 switch (type) {
5591 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5592 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5593 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5594 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5595 default:
5596 break;
5597 }
5598 }
5599 return type;
5600}
5601
5602static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5603ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5604{
5605 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5606}
5607
5608/**
5609 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5610 *
5611 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5612 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5613 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5614 *
5615 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5616 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5617 * matching GroupId management frame.
5618 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5619 */
5620void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5621 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5622
5623void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5624 int rssi_min_thold,
5625 int rssi_max_thold);
5626
5627void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5628
5629/**
5630 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
5631 *
5632 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5633 *
5634 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5635 *
5636 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5637 * applicable.
5638 */
5639int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5640
5641/**
5642 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5643 * @vif: virtual interface
5644 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5645 * @gfp: allocation flags
5646 *
5647 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5648 */
5649void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5650 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5651 gfp_t gfp);
5652
5653/**
5654 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5655 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5656 * @vif: virtual interface
5657 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5658 * @band: the band to transmit on
5659 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5660 *
5661 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5662 */
5663bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5664 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5665 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5666
5667/**
5668 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5669 *
5670 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5671 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5672 *
5673 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5674 *
5675 * private:
5676 *
5677 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5678 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5679 */
5680struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5681 u32 next_tsf;
5682 bool has_next_tsf;
5683
5684 u8 absent;
5685
5686 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5687 struct {
5688 u32 start;
5689 u32 duration;
5690 u32 interval;
5691 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5692};
5693
5694/**
5695 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5696 *
5697 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5698 * @data: NoA tracking data
5699 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5700 *
5701 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5702 */
5703int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5704 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5705
5706/**
5707 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5708 *
5709 * @data: NoA tracking data
5710 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5711 */
5712void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5713
5714/**
5715 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5716 * @vif: virtual interface
5717 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5718 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5719 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5720 * @gfp: allocation flags
5721 *
5722 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5723 */
5724void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5725 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5726 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
5727
5728/**
5729 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5730 *
5731 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5732 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5733 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5734 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5735 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5736 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5737 *
5738 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5739 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5740 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5741 *
5742 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5743 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5744 *
5745 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5746 */
5747int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5748
5749/**
5750 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5751 *
5752 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5753 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5754 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5755 *
5756 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5757 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5758 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5759 *
5760 * @sta: the station
5761 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5762 */
5763void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5764
5765/**
5766 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5767 *
5768 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5769 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5770 *
5771 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5772 */
5773struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5774 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5775
5776/**
5777 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5778 *
5779 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5780 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5781 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5782 *
5783 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5784 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5785 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5786 */
5787void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5788 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5789 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
5790
5791/**
5792 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5793 *
5794 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5795 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5796 *
5797 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5798 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5799 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5800 * @gfp: allocation flags
5801 */
5802void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5803 u8 inst_id,
5804 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5805 gfp_t gfp);
5806
5807/**
5808 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5809 *
5810 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5811 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5812 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5813 *
5814 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5815 * @match: match event information
5816 * @gfp: allocation flags
5817 */
5818void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5819 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5820 gfp_t gfp);
5821
5822#endif /* MAC80211_H */